652 Service
Transcript of 652 Service
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 1/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 2/569
i
THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-21
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main bodyOUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ..................................................................................17
DF-618OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................6
LU-301OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................3
LU-204OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................3
ZU-606OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................9
FS-526OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................7
SD-508OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................5
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 3/569
ii
PK-516OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 5
JS-602
OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 3
PI-505OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 3
FS-527OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 7
PK-517OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 5
SD-509OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 3
JS-603OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 3
AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503AU-101/AU-102............................................................................................................... 1
AU-201............................................................................................................................ 2
OT-503 ............................................................................................................................ 3
EK-604/605/SC-507EK-604............................................................................................................................ 1
EK-605............................................................................................................................ 2
SC-507 ........................................................................................................................... 4
SA-502CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 4/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-1
Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended.
Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in thecourse of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this service manual also for future service.
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and
“ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited
meaning.When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,WARNING AND CAUTION
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, mediumtrouble, and property damage
:Precaution when servicing the
product. General
precaution
Electric hazard High temperature
:Prohibition when servicing the
product. General
prohibition
Do not touch
with wet hand
Do not
disassemble
:Direction when servicing theproduct. General
instruction
Unplug Ground/Earth
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 5/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-2
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTABUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability isachieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
SAFETY WARNINGS
Prohibited Actions
DANGER• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with
wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between
relay contacts).
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed
by KMBT.
• Using parts not specified by KMBT.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 6/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-3
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power PlugWARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
uct’s rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product’s rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-
minals of the plug according to the following order:
•Black or Brown:L (line)
•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)
•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
kw
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 7/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-4
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi-
neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1. Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outletsecurely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
kw
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 8/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-5
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely insertedin the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-
uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or
pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check
whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 9/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-6
2. Installation Requirements
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-
tile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such
as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period oftime (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 10/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-7
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnectthe power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 11/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-8
• Do not leave the machine unattended during transporta-
tion, installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to
be unavoidably left unattended, face protrusions toward
the wall or take other necessary risk reducing action.
The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine
or be caught by a cable, falling to the floor or being
injured.
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover
detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-
tric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with
the door open or external covers removed, always be
attentive to the motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause unexpected haz-
ards.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be atten-
tive to the motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.
The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or
hand pinched between the machine and the option.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 12/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-9
• When mounting an option on the machine, be careful
about the clearance between the machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched
between the machine and the option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other
moving part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of
such parts and units, be careful about moving parts and
use care not to drop any part or unit. During the service
procedure, give sufficient support for any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
• Check the external covers and frame for possible sharp
edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful
about sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-
cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for
deterioration and sign of leakage.Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 13/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-10
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-
ing position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-
tion state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and
check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock orfire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 14/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-11
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let thesubstances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (ace-
tone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before
any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 15/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-12
[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-
mandé par le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-
tillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
NorwayADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 16/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-13
[5] Laser Safety
• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
5.1 Internal Laser Radiation
*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit
• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The
laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Maximum average radiation power (*)bizhub 652/602 13.8 µW
bizhub 552/502 11.8 µW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
A2WUP0C001DA
Laser Aperture of the Print Head
Unit
Print Head Unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 17/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-14
U.S.A., Canada(CDRH Regulation)• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-
dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and
must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States..
All Areas
Denmark
CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those
specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW
Wavelength 775-800 nm
ADVARSEL• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1sikkerheds kravene.
halvlederlaser
Laserdiodens højeste styrke 30 mW
bølgelængden 775-800 nm
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 18/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-15
Finland, Sweden
Norway
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-säteilylle.
puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW
aallonpituus 775-800 nm
VARNING!
• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen förlaserklass 1.
halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 30 mW
våglängden 775-800 nm
VARO!• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-
säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING!• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.
Betrakta ej stråien.
ADVERSEL• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-
ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensenfor laser klass 1.
halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 30 mW
bølgelengde 775-800 nm
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 19/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-16
5.2 Laser Safety Label
• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
5.3 Laser Caution Label
• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
A2WUP0E007DA
* Only for the U.S.A.
A2WUP0C002DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 20/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-17
5.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT
• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.
• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 21/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-18
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
A2WUP0E004DA
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.Touching any part other than thoseindicated may result in burns.
CAUTIONDo not burn used toner cartridges.Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.
WARNING
Do not burn the used waste tonerbox. Toner expelld from the fire is dangerous.
WARNING
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 22/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-19
A0P0P0E509DA
This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.
Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned
ON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 23/569
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
S-20
CAUTION:
This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turnedON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turnedON to avoid getting an electric shock.
High voltage
A2WUP0E005DA
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not totouch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our serviceoffice.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 24/569
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-21
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-
tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-
fied by every distributor.
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF ANACCIDENT
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 25/569
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-22
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 26/569
C-1
Composition of the service manualThis service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationshipbetween the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-
tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
<Field Service section>
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,
product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
CONFIGURATION/
OPERATION:
Explanation of configuration of each unit,
operating system, and control system
OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product
specifications
MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-
vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
adjustment etc.
TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
their countermeasures etc.
APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 27/569
C-2
Notation of the service manualA. Product nameIn this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
NOTE• bizhub 602/502 described in this manual is available only as Taiwan model.
B. Brand nameThe company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C. Feeding direction• When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short
edge feeding. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is
called the long edge feeding.
• Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the
paper size. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.
When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be
added to the paper size.
<Sample notation>
(1) bizhub 652/552/602/502: Main body
(2) Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7
Microsoft Windows Server 2003: Windows Server 2003
Microsoft Windows Server 2008: Windows Server 2008
When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:
Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/
Server 2003
Windows 7/Vista/XP
Windows Server 2008/Server 2003
Paper size Feeding direction Notation
A4Long edge feeding A4
Short edge feeding A4S
A3 Short edge feeding A3
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 28/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
652/552/602/502
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 29/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 30/569
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main body
OUTLINE1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION...................................................................................1
1.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502....................................................................................... 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 3
2.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................4
2.3 Paper .................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Materials ...............................................................................................................7
2.5 Print volume..........................................................................................................7
2.6 Machine specifications..........................................................................................8
2.7 Operating environment ......................................................................................... 8
2.8 Print functions....................................................................................................... 9
2.9 Scan functions .................................................................................................... 12
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION................................................................................ 14
4. PAPER PATH......................................................................................................... 15
4.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502.....................................................................................15
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 17
5.1 Control block diagram......................................................................................... 17
5.2 Image creation process ...................................................................................... 18
5.3 Image forming control ......................................................................................... 20
5.4 Process speed....................................................................................................20
6. INTERFACE SECTION ......................................................................................... 21
6.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 21
6.1.1 Front side ................................................................................................... 21
6.1.2 Rear side..................................................................................................... 22
6.1.3 Right side .................................................................................................... 24
7. SCANNER SECTION............................................................................................ 29
7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29
7.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 30
7.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 31
7.3.1 When the power is ON................................................................................ 31
7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed ........................................................ 32
7.3.3 DF original glass cleaning control ............................................................... 35
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 31/569
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
7.3.4 Original scanning area................................................................................ 37
7.3.5 Original size detection control..................................................................... 38
7.3.6 Image processing ....................................................................................... 40
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) ........................................................................ 41
8.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 41
8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 428.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 42
8.2.2 Laser exposure process.............................................................................. 44
8.2.3 Laser emission timing................................................................................. 46
8.2.4 Laser emission stop.................................................................................... 47
8.2.5 Laser emission area ................................................................................... 47
8.2.6 Image processing ....................................................................................... 48
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.................................................................................. 49
9.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 49
9.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 50
9.2.1 Toner cartridge drive................................................................................... 50
9.2.2 Toner hopper drive...................................................................................... 50
9.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 51
9.3.1 Replenishing the toner hopper with toner................................................... 51
9.3.2 Replenishing the developing unit with toner ............................................... 53
9.3.3 Toner cartridge life control .......................................................................... 55
9.3.4 Toner cartridge detection............................................................................ 57
9.3.5 Toner spill prevention shutter ...................................................................... 58
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION .................................................................................... 59
10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 59
10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 60
10.2.1 Drum unit drive ........................................................................................... 60
10.2.2 Developing unit drive .................................................................................. 61
10.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 6210.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 62
10.3.2 Imaging unit detection................................................................................. 62
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION......................................................................................... 63
11.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 63
11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 64
11.2.1 Photo conductor drive................................................................................. 64
11.2.2 Charge corona cleaner drive ...................................................................... 65
11.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 66
11.3.1 Photo conductor drive gear......................................................................... 66
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 32/569
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
iii
11.3.2 Main erase lamp control.............................................................................. 68
11.3.3 Photo conductor cleaning ........................................................................... 69
11.3.4 Photo conductor charge control ..................................................................69
11.3.5 Charge corona cleaning control .................................................................. 70
11.3.6 Ozone removal............................................................................................ 72
11.3.7 Detection of drum unit/K ............................................................................. 73
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION ............................................................................ 75
12.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 75
12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 76
12.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 77
12.3.1 Developer flow............................................................................................. 77
12.3.2 Auto refining developing system ................................................................. 79
12.3.3 Developing bias........................................................................................... 80
12.3.4 Toner density control................................................................................... 81
12.3.5 Detection of developing unit/K .................................................................... 82
12.3.6 Toner scattering prevention.........................................................................83
12.3.7 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................83
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION .................................................................................... 84
13.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 84
13.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 86
13.2.1 Transfer belt drive........................................................................................ 86
13.2.2 Transfer belt cleaning section drive.............................................................87
13.2.3 1st transfer roller drive ................................................................................ 88
13.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 89
13.3.1 1st transfer roller control .............................................................................89
13.3.2 Transfer belt cleaning ..................................................................................91
13.3.3 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................92
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION................................................................................... 93
14.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 9314.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 95
14.2.1 Pressure/retraction drive .............................................................................95
14.2.2 2nd transfer roller drive ............................................................................... 95
14.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 96
14.3.1 2nd transfer roller control ............................................................................96
14.3.2 2nd transfer control ..................................................................................... 97
14.3.3 2nd transfer roller cleaning.......................................................................... 98
14.3.4 Paper separation control .............................................................................99
14.3.5 Sensor protection......................................................................................100
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 33/569
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
iv
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION....................................................................... 101
15.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 101
15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 103
15.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 104
15.3.1 Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box .................................. 104
15.3.2 Toner path in the waste toner box............................................................. 10815.3.3 Waste toner box set detection .................................................................. 111
15.3.4 Waste toner box full detection................................................................... 112
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)......................................................... 114
16.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 114
16.1.1 Major components .................................................................................... 114
16.1.2 Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 115
16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 116
16.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 117
16.3.1 Up/down control........................................................................................ 117
16.3.2 Paper feed control..................................................................................... 119
16.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 126
16.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 128
16.3.5 Paper temperature detection control......................................................... 129
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)......................................................... 130
17.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 130
17.1.1 Major components (tray3)......................................................................... 130
17.1.2 Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)............................. 131
17.1.3 Major components (tray4)......................................................................... 132
17.1.4 Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 133
17.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 134
17.2.1 Tray3 ......................................................................................................... 134
17.2.2 Tray3 horizontal transport ......................................................................... 134
17.2.3 Tray4 ......................................................................................................... 13517.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 136
17.3.1 Up/down control........................................................................................ 136
17.3.2 Paper Feed control ................................................................................... 139
17.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 145
17.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 146
17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control ................................................................ 149
17.3.6 Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in................................................................... 150
17.3.7 Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in........................................ 151
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) ......................................................... 152
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 34/569
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
v
18.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 152
18.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 153
18.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 154
18.3.1 Bypass paper lifting motion control ...........................................................154
18.3.2 paper feed control ..................................................................................... 155
18.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 15718.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 160
18.3.5 Detection of bypass unit opened/closed ................................................... 161
18.3.6 Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted ...................................... 162
19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION................................................................... 163
19.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 163
19.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 164
19.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 165
19.3.1 Vertical transport control ........................................................................... 165
19.3.2 Transport motor control ............................................................................. 165
19.3.3 Operation timing........................................................................................ 165
20. REGISTRATION SECTION................................................................................. 167
20.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 167
20.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 167
20.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 168
20.3.1 Registration control ................................................................................... 168
20.3.2 OHP detection...........................................................................................170
20.3.3 Paper transport speed control................................................................... 171
21. FUSING SECTION.............................................................................................. 172
21.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 172
21.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 174
21.2.1 Heating roller drive .................................................................................... 174
21.2.2 Fusing pressure roller pressure drive........................................................ 174
21.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 175
21.3.1 Fusing speed correction............................................................................ 175
21.3.2 Fusing pressure/retraction control.............................................................178
21.3.3 Heating roller heating control .................................................................... 179
21.3.4 Heating control of the fusing pressure roller ............................................. 184
21.3.5 Fusing temperature control ....................................................................... 185
21.3.6 Heating roller temperature sensor............................................................. 190
21.3.7 Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection....................... 191
21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature control ........................................... 192
21.3.9 Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control.......... 192
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 35/569
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
vi
21.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature................................................. 193
21.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control .................................................... 194
21.3.12 Brandnew detection .................................................................................. 195
21.3.13 Fusing cooling control............................................................................... 195
22. DUPLEX SECTION............................................................................................. 198
22.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 198
22.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 199
22.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 200
22.3.1 Paper conveyance control......................................................................... 200
22.3.2 Duplex circulation control.......................................................................... 202
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION ...................................................................................... 208
23.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 208
23.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 209
23.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 210
23.3.1 Transport control....................................................................................... 210
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL ................................................................... 213
24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 213
24.1.1 Image stabilization control chart ............................................................... 214
24.1.2 Overview of each control .......................................................................... 215
24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence ............................................... 217
24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition ................................................ 218
24.3.1 In standby state ........................................................................................ 218
24.3.2 Before, during, and after a print cycle....................................................... 219
24.4 Utility/Service Mode.......................................................................................... 220
24.4.1 Expert Adjustment .................................................................................... 220
24.4.2 Service Mode............................................................................................ 220
24.5 Image stabilization control operating time ........................................................ 221
25. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................................................................ 222
25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram ........................................... 222
25.2 Write section image processing block diagram ................................................ 223
26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION............................................................................... 226
26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON............................. 226
26.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................ 226
26.1.2 Operation.................................................................................................. 226
26.1.3 Auto power OFF system ........................................................................... 227
26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON............................... 228
26.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................ 22826.2.2 Operation.................................................................................................. 228
26.3 Power cables .................................................................................................... 229
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 36/569
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
vii
26.3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................229
26.3.2 Operation ..................................................................................................229
27. FAN CONTROL................................................................................................... 230
27.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 230
27.2 Operation.......................................................................................................... 231
27.2.1 Function .................................................................................................... 23127.2.2 Control conditions ..................................................................................... 232
28. COUNTER CONTROL........................................................................................235
28.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 235
28.2 Operation.......................................................................................................... 235
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 37/569
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
viii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 38/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502
1/2 System front view
*1: This option may not be available depending on the sales area.
*2: Except for the North America and Europe area.
[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [12] Finisher FS-527
[2] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-101 [13] Saddle stitcher SD-509
[3] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-102 [14] Job separator JS-603
[4] Authentication unit: IC card type AU-201 [15] Punch kit PK-517
[5] Working table WT-506 [16] Z folding unit ZU-606
[6] Keyboard holder KH-101 [17] Saddle stitcher SD-508
[7] Local interface kit EK-604 [18] Finisher FS-526
[8] Local interface kit EK-605 *1 [19] Punch kit PK-516
[9] Mount kit MK-715 *2 [20] Post inserter PI-505
[10] Large capacity unit LU-301 [21] Job separator JS-602
[11] Large capacity unit LU-204 [22] Output tray OT-503
[1]
[2]
[5]
[7][8]
[6]
[10]
[11]
[22]
A0P0F1E503DC
[18]
[17]
[3] [4]
[9]
[19] [20] [21]
[16]
[15] [14]
[12][13]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 39/569
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
2/2 System rear view
*1: North America and Europe only*2: Europe only.
*3: The LK-103 v2 is not available for North America area.
NOTE• To install the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) or the Fax kit (FK-502), installing the
Mount kit (MK-720) is necessary.• As the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) and the FAX kit (FK-502) line 2 required for the
second fax line need to be installed at the same place, only one of them can beinstalled.
[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [7] Mount kit MK-720
[2] Stamp unit SP-501 [8] Key counter kit KIT-1
[3] Fax kit FK-502 [9] Key counter kit KIT-CF *2
[4] Heater HT-508 *1 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2 *3
/105
[5] Scan accelerator kit SA-502 [11] Upgrade kit UK-203
[6] Security kit SC-507
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[9]
[10] [11]
[6]
[7]
[5]
A2WUT1E004DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 40/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
3
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 Type
Type Combination scanner and printer console type
Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper
Printing process Laser electrostatic printing systemPC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability)
Scanning density Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi
Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W
Platen Stationary (mirror scan)
Original scanningMirror scanning CCD optical system
* Sheet through system when ADF is used
Registration Rear left edge
Paper feedingseparation system
Manual bypass : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 1 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 2 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 3 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Tray 4 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism
Exposure system 1 polygon 2 beam exposure and polygon mirror scan system
Exposure densityEquivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction ×
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Developing system Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system
Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function
Neutralizing system Red LED system
Image transfer system Belt image transfer system (1st)/roller image transfer system (2nd)Paper separating
system
Combination of curvature, separating claws, and bias system
Fusing system Belt IH fusing system
Heating system Heating: IH heating, Soaking: Halogen lamp
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 41/569
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
2.2 Functions
Types of original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17
Max. original weight 2 kg
Multiple copies 1 to 9999
Warm-up time
(at ambient tempera-
ture of 23° C/73.4° F
and rated source volt-
age)
When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power
switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more
(room temperature is 23° C/73.4° F)
bizhub 652 30 sec. or less
bizhub 552 30 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
90 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
60 sec. or less
When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being
ON (room temperature is 23° C/73.4° F)
bizhub 652 30 sec. or less
bizhub 552 30 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
90 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
60 sec. or less
Image loss Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),
Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),
Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)
First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, full size)
bizhub 652 3.8 sec. or less
bizhub 552 4.3 sec. or less
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
4.0 sec. or less
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
4.3 sec. or less
Processing speed Plain paper bizhub 652: 310.00 mm/s
bizhub 552: 264.00 mm/s
bizhub 602: 288.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
bizhub 502: 264.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
Thick 1, Thick 1+ bizhub 652: 155.00 mm/s
bizhub 552: 132.00 mm/s
bizhub 602: 155.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
bizhub 502: 132.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)
Thick 2, Thick 3,
Thick 4, OHP, Post
card, Envelope, Labelsheet, glossy mode
bizhub 652/552/602/502: 120.00 mm/s
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 42/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
5
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
Copying speed for
multi-copy cycle
(A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, plain
paper, tray 1)
bizhub 652 1-sided: 65 copies/min, 2-sided: 65 copies/min
(8 1 / 2 x 11: 64 copies/min)
bizhub 552 1-sided: 55 copies/min, 2-sided: 55 copies/min
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 60 copies/min, 2-sided: 60 copies/min
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 50 copies/min, 2-sided: 50 copies/min
Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000
Reduction Metric area x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866
Inch area x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785
Enlargement Metric area x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000
Inch area x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000
Zoom ratios memory 3 memories
Variable zoom ratios x0.250 to x4.000 in 0.001 increments
Paper size Tray 1/Tray 2 Metric area A3 Wide, A3 to A5S, A6S, post card
Inch area 11 x 17 to 8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,12 1 / 4 x 18
Tray 3/Tray 4 A4, B5, A5, 8 1 / 2 x 11, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 16K, postcard
Bypass tray
Metric area
A3 wide, A3 to B6S, A6S, postcard,
long size paper (210 mm to 297 mm x
457.3 mm to 1,200 mm)
Inch area
11 x 17 to 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,
12 1 / 4 x 18, long size paper (8 1 / 4 to 1111 / 16 x 18 to 47 1 / 4)
Copy exit tray capacity
(When OT-503 ismounted)
Plain paper 250 sheets
Thick paper 10 sheets
OHP transparencies 1 sheet
External memoryfunction
Supported external
memory devices
USB flash memory device that supports the USB (2.0)
interface
FAT32-formatted memory device
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 43/569
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
2.3 Paper
*1: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.
*2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used.
*3: 127 to 210 g/m2 / 33.75 to 55.75 lb
Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2
(16 to 24 lb) orthick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.25 to 68 lb) are
reliably fed.
TypePaper source (maximum tray capacity)
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray
P a p e r
t y p e
Plain paper
(60 to 90 g/m2 / 16
to 24 lb)
❍
(500 sheets)
❍
(500 sheets)
❍
(1500 sheets)
❍
(1000 sheets)
❍
(150 sheets)
Translucent paper – – – – –
OHP film – – – – ❍
(20 sheets)
Thick paper 1 *1
(91 to 120 g/m2
/ 24.25 to 32 lb)
❍
(400 sheets)
❍
(400 sheets)
❍
(1150 sheets)
❍
(750 sheets)
❍
(100 sheets)
Thick paper 1+ *1
(121 to 157 g/m2
/ 32 to 41.75 lb)
❍
(280 sheets)
❍
(280 sheets)
❍
(800 sheets)
❍
(500 sheets)
❍
(80 sheets)
Thick paper 2 *1
(158 to 209 g/m2 / 42 to 55.5 lb)
❍ (250 sheets)
❍ (250 sheets)
❍ (700 sheets)
❍ (450 sheets)
❍ (70 sheets)
Thick paper 3 *1,2
(210 to 256 g/m2
/ 55.75 to 68 lb)
❍
(200 sheets)
❍
(200 sheets)
❍
(600 sheets)
❍
(400 sheets)
❍
(60 sheets)
Thick paper 4 *1,2
(257 to 300 g/m2
/ 68.25 to 80 lb)
– – – – ❍
(50 sheets)
Postcards – – ❍
(200 sheets)
❍
(200 sheets)
❍
(50 sheets)
Envelopes – – – – ❍
(10 sheets)Labels – – – – ❍ (50 sheets)
Long size paper – – – – ❍ (1 sheet)
C o p y p a p e r d i m e n s i o n s
Width139.7 to 311.1 mm
5 1 / 2 to 12 1 / 2 inch
A4, B5, A5, 8 1 / 2 x 11,
5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 16K, postcard
90 to 311.1 mm
3 1 / 2 to 12 1 / 4 inch
Length182.0 to 457.2 mm
7 1 / 4 to 18 inch
139.7 to 457.2
mm
5 1 / 2 to 18 inch
L o n g s i z e p a p e r * 3
Width – – – –210 to 297 mm
8 1 / 4 to 11 3 / 4 inch
Length – – – –457 to 1200 mm
18 to 47 1 / 4 inch
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 44/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
7
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
2.4 Materials
*1: Field standard yield• This machine has the field standard yield which indicates the available print numbers
estimated by the quantities and usage of the unit in the market standard job mode.
Yields for each preventative maintenance unit will differ depending on actual usage.
• The market standard job modes for this unit are as follows.
2.5 Print volume
• bizhub 652
• bizhub 552
Parts name Field standard yield *1 Type name
Toner cartridge 37,500 prints TN618
Developing unit 1,140,000 prints DV612K
Drum unit 285000 prints DR612K
Waste toner box 160,000 prints WX-102
Market standard job modes
bizhub 652 bizhub 552 bizhub 602 bizhub 502
Printing 7 P/J 6 P/J 6 P/J 5 P/JPaper size A4: 93 %, A4S: 7 %
Total print volume/month US: 19,500
EU: 25,600
US: 13,500
EU: 17,200- -
No. of
image
stabilization
operations
No. of times power
turned on20 times/month
No. of returns from
sleep modeNone
Changes in
surrounding
environment
None
US Average 19,500 prints/month
Maximum 190,000 prints/month
EU Average 25,600 prints/month
Maximum 190,000 prints/month
US Average 13,500 prints/month
Maximum 150,000 prints/month
EU Average 17,200 prints/month
Maximum 150,000 prints/month
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 45/569
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
2.6 Machine specifications
*1: Width when the bypass tray is closed.
*2: Including the control panel.
*3: Space requirements are the respective values when the finisher tray extension, LCU,
and paper trays are pulled out and the ADF is raised.
2.7 Operating environment
Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V
Current: 100 V 15 A
110 V 15 A
120 V 16 A
127 V 16 A220-240 V 10 A
Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz ± 3 Hz
Max power consumption 100 V 1,500 W or less
110 V 1,500 W or less
120 V 2,100 W or less
127 V 2,100 W or less
220-240 V 2,100 W or less
Dimensions 650 *1 (W) x 879 *2 (H) x 1,155 mm (H)
25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)Space requirements 2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3
100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3
Weight Machine Approx. 201.0 kg / 443.0 lb (without IU and TC)
IU and TC Approx. 4.8 kg / 10.5 lb
Temperature 10 to 30° C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour)
Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)
Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 46/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
9
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
2.8 Print functions
Type Built-in printer controller
RAM 2 GB (shared with the main body)
HDD 250 GB (shared with the main body)
Interface Standard Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)
USB 2.0
Option (EK-604/605) USB 2.0
Frame type Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP,
FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP,
NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME,
IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD
Print speed
(A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, plain
paper)
bizhub 652 1-sided: 65 ppm, 2-sided: 65 ppm (64 ppm for 8 1 / 2 x 11)
bizhub 552 1-sided: 55 ppm, 2-sided: 55 ppm
bizhub 602
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 60 ppm, 2-sided: 60 ppm
bizhub 502
(Taiwan only)
1-sided: 50 ppm, 2-sided: 50 ppm
Printer language PCL5c/6 Emulation
PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation
PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)
XPS ver.1.0
Print resolution Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction ×
600 dpi in sub scanning direction
Printer fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts
Supported computer IBM PC/AT compatible machine,
Macintosh
(PowerPC/Intel processor : Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5/10.6 for Intel processor)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 47/569
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
Printer driver PCL KONICAMI-
NOLTA driver (PCL
driver)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 EditionWindows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 R2 StandardWindows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Windows 7 Home Basic
Windows 7 Home Premium *
Windows 7 Professional *
Windows 7 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Ultimate *
*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
PostScript KONI-
CAMINOLTA driver
(PS driver)
Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Windows 7 Home Basic
Windows 7 Home Premium *
Windows 7 Professional *
Windows 7 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Ultimate *
*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 48/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
11
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
Printer driver XPS KONICAMI-
NOLTA driver (XPS
driver)
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows Server 2008 R2 StandardWindows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Windows 7 Home Basic
Windows 7 Home Premium *
Windows 7 Professional *
Windows 7 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Ultimate *
*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
PostScript PPD
driver (PS-PPD)
Mac OS 9.2 or later
PostScript PPD
driver (Mac OS X)
Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6
Fax driver Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition
Windows XP Professional x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition
Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition
Windows Vista Business *
Windows Vista Enterprise *
Windows Vista Home Basic *
Windows Vista Home Premium *
Windows Vista Ultimate *
Windows Server 2008 Standard *
Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *
Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard
Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
Windows 7 Home Basic
Windows 7 Home Premium *
Windows 7 Professional *Windows 7 Enterprise *
Windows 7 Ultimate *
*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 49/569
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
2.9 Scan functions
Scanner Scannable range Same as the copier
(Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)
Scan speed
(When the ADF is used)
78 pages/min (A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, 1-sided, 300 dpi)
Functions Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan toBOX, Scan to WebDAV, Scan to Web service
Scanning resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi
TWAIN Driver TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver
Supported operating
systems
Windows XP Home Edition (SP3 or later)
Windows XP Professional (SP3 or later)
Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later) *1
Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later) *1
Windows 7 Home Basic *2Windows 7 Home Premium *2
Windows 7 Professional *2
Windows 7 Enterprise *2
Windows 7 Ultimate *2
*1: 32 bits (x86) environment are supported
*2: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are sup-
ported
PC Conform to the specification of operating system
Required memory Conform to the specification of operating system
Network Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set
Hard disk Required 20 MB or more disk space
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 50/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
13
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
• This machine supports Unicode. However, if the operating system used in a destination
computer does not support Unicode (2 and 3 byte characters), SMB transmission may
be unavailable. If SMB transmission is unsuccessful, specify the shared name of the des-
tination folder using ASCII codes (one-byte alphanumeric characters).
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
SMB Supported
operating
systems
Windows Windows NT4.0 each Server/Workstation
Windows 2000 each Server/Professional
Windows XP Home/Professional
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows Server 2008 each edition
Windows Server 2008 R2 each editionWindows 7 each edition
DFS function is supported only in the environment
that structured with the following Windows server
operating systems.
Windows 2000 Server each edition
Windows Server 2003 each edition
Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition
Windows Server 2008 each edition
Windows Server 2008 R2 each edition
Direct hosting function apply to the following oper-
ating systems.
Windows 2000 each edition
Windows XP each edition
Windows Vista each edition
Windows Server 2008 each edition
Windows Server 2008 R2 each edition
Windows 7 each edition
Samba * 2.2.x
3.x
Novell
Netware
Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 51/569
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
3. SECTION CONFIGURATION
A2WUT1C002DA
Scanner section(IR section)
Fusing section
Transfer corona section
Write section (PH section)
Paper feed section(Bypass tray)
Paper feed section (Tray1)
Paper feed section (Tray2)Toner collecting sectionIn front door (dotted linesection)
Imaging unit section(IU section)
Toner supply section
Paper feed section (Tray4)
Paper feed section (Tray3)
Duplex section(standard)
Auto document feed section * Standard
Paper exit section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 52/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER PATH
15
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
O U T L I N E
4. PAPER PATH
4.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502
A2WUT1C003DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 53/569
4. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
bizhub652/552/602/502
O U T L I N E
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 54/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
17
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
5.1 Control block diagram
A2WUT2E044DA
CCD board
R G B
R G B
K
Scannerrelay board
Original glassposition controlboard
Inverter board
Control panel
Vendor
Fusing unit
DC power supply
Service EEPROM
Developing motor
High voltage unit
Paper feed/ transportdrive board
Printer controlboard
MFP board
PH relay board
PH section
Scannersection
Mainbody
Index board
HDD
USB board
Authentic-ation unit
Fax board
Laser driveboard
Paper feedsection
Duplex unit
Paper feed unitFinisher
Polygon motor
Bypass traysection
PC drum motor
Key counter
Total counter
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 55/569
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Image creation process
[1]Photoelectric
conversion
• The light reflected off the surface of the original is separated into dif-
ferent colors using the color filters (R, G, and B); CCD then converts
it into a corresponding electric signal and outputs the signal to the
printer image processing section (MFP board).
[2]
Printer image
processing
(No illustration is pro-
vided)
• The electric signal is converted to 8-bit digital image signals. After
going through some corrections, the digital image signals is con-
verted to VIDEO signals (K).
• D/A conversion will be performed after the VIDEO signals (K) is cor-
rected. This data will control the emission of the laser diode.
[3] Photo conductor• The image of the original projected onto the surface of the photo con-
ductor is changed to a corresponding electrostatic latent image.[4] Charging • Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.
[5] Exposure• Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic
latent image.
[6] Developing
• The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing
chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image formed on
the surface of the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible,
developed image.
• AC and DC negative bias voltages are applied to the developing
roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background image
portion.
[7] 1st transfer
• A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the transfer belt,
thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the
photo conductor (K) to be transferred onto the transfer belt.
A2WUT2C008DA
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5][6]
[7][9][10]
[11]
[8]
[13]
[15]
[16]
[12]
[14]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 56/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION
19
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[8] 2nd transfer
• A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the paper, thereby
allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the transfer
belt to be transferred onto the paper.
[9] Separation
• The paper, which has undergone the 2nd transfer process, is neutral-
ized so that it can be properly separated from the transfer belt by the
paper separator claws.
[10] Transfer belt cleaning
• The residual toner left on the transfer belt is collected by the cleaning
brush to clean the surface of the transfer belt.
[11] Main erase
• The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with LED light, which
neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the
photo conductor.
[12]Photo conductor
cleaning
• The residual toner left on the photo conductor is collected by the
cleaning blade to clean the surface of the photo conductor.
[13] Fusing
• The visible toner image transferred onto the surface of the paper is
melted by the heat of the heating roller and fixed to the paper by pres-
sure of the fusing pressure roller.
[14] Paper exit• The paper, for which the toner image has been properly fixed, is fed
out onto the exit tray.
[15]Paper exit
(two-sided print)
• For two-sided printing, the 1-sided printed paper is turned over and
transported onto the duplex unit.
[16] Duplex
• The 1-sided printed paper, which has been turned over, is fed into the
main body, so that the paper can be subjected to the second print
cycle.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 57/569
5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
5.3 Image forming control
5.4 Process speed
A2WUT2E097DA
Developing bias DC K
Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)
K PC drum motor (M18)
Charge K
BCL (+)
BCL (-)
Cleaner motor (M38)
Transfer belt motor (M1)
2nd transfer roller pressure retraction
1st transfer pressure retraction
Image write start signal
Developing bias AC K
1st transfer K
2nd transfer
Neutralization
Registration motor (M2)Take-up motor (M22)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Gate switch solenoid (SD1)
Exit motor (M4)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Toner suction fan motor (FM7)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
Suction fan motor (FM1)Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor (FM15)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)
PH cooling fan motor (FM14)
Polygon motor (M34)
LD
Dehumidification heater
Fusing motor (M30)
Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)
K developing motor (M19)
Paper typeProcess speed (mm/s)
Plain paper
Thick
paper1
Thick
paper1+
Thick
paper2
Thick
paper3
(post-
cards)
Thick
paper4
Enve-
lopesOHP
Mode
Normal
mode
(matte)
Gloss
mode
bizhub 652 310 120 155 120
bizhub 552/502 264 120 132 120
bizhub 602 288 120 155 120
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 58/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION
21
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
6. INTERFACE SECTION
6.1 Configuration
6.1.1 Front side
A2WUT2C084DA
A0P0T5C050DA
Total counter
Main power switch(Power switch) (SW1)
Total counter
Main power switch
(Power switch) (SW1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 59/569
6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
22
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
6.1.2 Rear side
A. Upper side
A0P0T5C053DA
Upper side
Lower side
A0P0T5C054DA
Toner filter Optional finishing connection connector
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 60/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION
23
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Lower side
NOTE• For the dehumidification heater, see “17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control”.
A2WUT2C085DA
Dehumidification heater switch(SW2)
Not used
Power cable 1
Not used
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 61/569
6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
24
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
6.1.3 Right side
A0P0T5C057DA
Front side
Rear side (upper)
Rear side (lower)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 62/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION
25
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
A. Front side
NOTE• Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable. If the USB cable
extended from the USB port at the rear (upper) portion is unplugged, the USB portat the front side is no longer operational.
A0P0T5C059DA
A0P0T5C060DA
USB port (optional) USB port (standard)
Sub power switch
Audio output terminal
(Japan only)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 63/569
6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
26
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Rear side (upper)
NOTE• The USB cable is extended up to the USB port at the front side. If the cable is
unplugged from the USB port, therefore, the USB port at the front side is no longeroperational. Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable.
• Sliding the service port cover will reveal the port dedicated to firmware upgrading.
• The service port cover is provided with a service port sensor that detects that thecover is opened or closed.• When the service port sensor is blocked, the machine determines that the cover is
closed.
NOTE• For details of “firmware upgrading”, see Field Service.• Be sure to close the service port cover after the firmware upgrading is completed.
A0P0T5C061DA
A0P0T5C062DA
USB port (standard:dedicated to local print)
Serial port (standard:not used)
Network port (standard:
dedicated to network print)
Service port cover fixing
screw
Service port cover (withopen/close detectionsystem)
USB port (standard)
Service port (standard:dedicated to firmwareupgrading)
USB extension cable (standard:USB extension cable to the USBboard at the front side)
USB extension cable
Service port cover
Service port (dedicated to firmware upgrading)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 64/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION
27
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
A0P0T5C063DB
Service port cover
Service port sensor(PS60)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 65/569
6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
28
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Rear side (lower)
A0P0T5C065DA
A0P0T5C064DA
Fax kit (optional)
TEL terminal (optional)
TEL terminal (optional)
LINE terminal (optional)
LINE terminal (optional)
Line extension kit(optional)* The second line is onthe outside.
Control panel connectionconnector (standard)
Fax kit (optional)
Scanner section connectionconnector (standard)
Not used
Security kit(optional)
Note: This photo shows a system mounted with a fax kit and a security kit.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 66/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
29
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
7. SCANNER SECTION
7.1 Configuration
A0P0T5C090DA
A0P0T5C058DA
20 degree sensor(PS202)
Scanner relay board(REYB/SCAN)
Scanner motor (M201)
Lens CCD unit
USB board (UB)
Mirror unit
Original glass movingmotor (M202)
Exposure unit
Scanner home
sensor (PS201)
Glass moving unitInverter board (INVB)
Optical cooling fan
motor (FM201)
Original glass positioncontrol board (OGPCB)
Original size detectionsensor 1 (PS204)
Status displayboard (MCMB)
Fax speaker (SP) Original size detectionsensor 2 (PS205)
Original cover sensor(RS201)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 67/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
30
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
7.2 Drive
A00JT2C003DA
Scanner drivecable/R
Mirror unit
Exposure unit
Scanner motor (M201)
Scanner drive cable/F
Scanner home sensor (PS201)
Original glass movingmotor (M202)
Glass moving unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 68/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
31
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 When the power is ON
1. The exposure unit moves from the scanner standby position to the home position.
2. Exposure unit moves from the home position to the shading position (under the
shading correction sheet) and stops (in scanning direction).
3. The exposure lamp turns ON and the gain value of the CCD sensor output voltage
to R, G, and B is adjusted.4. After adjusting the gain value, a shading correction is performed. The exposure
lamp goes out when the correction is completed.
5. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.
6. The exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby position.
A00JT2C004DA
Home position
Shading position
Scanning direction
Returning direction
Standby position
A0P0T2C001AA
Scanner movement
Shading position
Standby position
Home position
The exposure lamp (FL201) turns ONand a gain adjustment and shadingcorrection are made.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 69/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
32
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed
A. Original scanning modeOriginal scanning mode has two types: Original cover mode and DF mode.
(1) Original cover mode1. Turning the Start key ON will turn the exposure lamp ON (at the standby position)
2. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the shading position.
At the shading position, the gain adjustment is made.3. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the scan start posi-
tion.
4. To start a scan, the exposure unit moves from the scan start position to the leading
edge of an original while performing shading correction. The exposure unit will start
reading the original image from the leading edge. The unit will finish reading the
image at the back edge of the image.
5. The exposure lamp will be OFF when the reading is complete.
6. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.
Then the exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby posi-
tion. It scans only once even for the color scan, since R, G, and B data will all bememorized in one scanning.
A0P0T2C002AA
A00JT2C005DA
Shading position
Homeposition Standby position
Standby position
Scan start position
Scan startposition
Leading edge of the image
OriginalBack edge of the image
Scan
Return
Shading position
Home position
Leading edge of the image
Exposure lamp(FL201) ON
Back edge of the image
Scannermovement
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 70/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
33
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
(2) DF mode• The original fed by the document feeder will be read at the original DF glass for. The
Exposure unit will move to the reading position and stops. The document will be read as
the paper is transferred.
• bizhub 652/552: DF-618
A0P0T5C109DA
DF original glass
Reading position
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 71/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
34
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Original scanning control• The light reflected off the exposed original reaches the CCD sensor via the lens.
• The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) that varies according to the intensity
of the light.
• One CCD sensor has a photoreceiver that individually responds to each of the three pri-
mary colors of R, G, and B.
• The electric signal is converted to digital data for each of R, G, and B by the board
(CCDB), becoming individual digital signals.• Analog-to-digital conversion is made according to an instruction given by the MFP board
(MFPB).
(1) Calibration
The following adjustment and correction (calibration) are made before the original isscanned, so that the image of the original can be adequately read. For details, see “25.
IMAGE PROCESSING”.
See P.222
• Gain adjustment
• Shading correction
R
G
B
9.325 µm
9.325 µm
4036ma2602c0
37.3 µm
37.3 µm
CCD sensorScanning direction
S u b s c a n n i n g
d i r e c t i o n
Main scanningdirection
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 72/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
35
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
7.3.3 DF original glass cleaning control
A. DF original glass cleaning• The reading lines will occur when DF original glass has stain. Shift mechanism for the DF
original glass is provided to avoid this trouble.
• The stand-by position for the DF original glass will be detected by the glass home sen-
sor.
• DF original glass will move back and forth by the original glass moving motor.
B. Details of DF original glass cleaning• The DF original glass makes three different movements. Each mode has different move-
ment.• The following explains different movements and different modes.
(1) Normal movement performed each time after reading a sheet of original• The DF original glass moves slightly back or forth every time after reading a sheet of
multiple originals. This changes the image reading position on the DF original glass and
prevents the repeated occurrence of lines in the sub scan direction due to the same stain
on the glass.
NOTEThis cleaning operation is not performed when the setting is made in the service mode as fol-lows. [System 2] - [Split Line Detect. Setting] - [Prior Detection] - [Not Set]
A00JT2C007DA
Original glass moving motor (M202)
Glass home sensor
(PS203)
A00JT2C538DAA00JT2C539DA
The first original The second original
DF original glass
Image reading position Image reading position
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 73/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
36
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
(2) DF original glass cleaning movement performed each time after reading a sheetof original
• While reading multiple originals consecutively, the DF original glass moves widely back
and forth between each original reading.
• Due to the effect of the step sheet that makes contact with the DF original glass, stain on
the DF original glass can be removed from the reading position and reduce image
streaks in the sub scan direction.
• Stain collected on the DF original glass is removed from the reading section by the trail-
ing edge of an original that is passing by.
(3) DF original glass cleaning movement performed after completing a job• After the completion of a job, the DF original glass moves widely back and forth to
remove stain remaining on the surface. This reduces the occurrence of lines in the sub
scan direction.
A00JT2C540DA
DF original glass Image reading position
Step sheet
A00JT2C544DA
StainDF original glass
Original
Image reading position
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 74/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
37
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Step sheet• The step sheet is provided in order to reduce the stain on the DF original glass.
• It is installed to the operator side of the DF original glass in order to reduce the area orig-
inal touches the glass.
7.3.4 Original scanning area
Original scanning areas vary depending on a scanning mode.
A. Original cover mode• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
• Sub scanning direction: Max. 431.8 mm
B. DF mode• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm
• Sub scanning direction: Max. 1,000.0 mm
9J07T2C007DA
Step sheet
DF original glass
Original
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 75/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
38
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
7.3.5 Original size detection control
A. Detection method• For detection of the original size, the reflective size sensors detect the length of the orig-
inal while the CCD detects the width of the original.
• For the original of an irregular size, the nearest standard size on the large side is applied
to it.
A0P0T5C058DA
4037T2E597AA
A0P0T5C074DA
Automatic document feeder
20 degrees sensor (PS202)
CCD unitExposure unit
Original standardposition
Original readposition
Exposure unit
313.5 mm
Original sizedetectionsensor 1 (PS204)
20 degrees
Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)
Original size detection sensor 2 (PS205) *
Original sizedetectionsensor 2 (PS205) *
346.1 mm
*: Option
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 76/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION
39
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Original size judgement
NOTE• Table 1 or 2 can be selected in the service mode.
Criterion
Metric area & china areas
Table 1
Table 2
*: Option
Inch areas
Table 1
Table 2
*: Option
Original
size
detection
sensor 1
Main scanning width (mm)
0~130.0 ~153.0 ~187.0 ~200.0 ~215.0 ~225.0 ~261.5 ~275.0 275.1~
OFF No original A5S B5S 16KS A4S B5 B5 16K A4
ON A3 - - - - FLS B4 8K A3
Original
size
detection
sensor
Main scanning width (mm)
1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~200 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~261.5 ~274.7 ~284.4 284.5~
OFF OFF
No
origi-
nal
51 / 2 ×
81 / 2 SA5S B5S
16K
SA4S
81 / 2 ×
11 S- B5 16K
81 / 2 ×
11A4
ON OFF A3 - - - - FLS FLS FLS - - - -
- ON A3 - - - - -81 / 2 ×
14- B4 8K 11 × 17 A3
Original size
detection
sensor 1
Main scanning width (mm)
0~130.0 ~144.7 ~220.9 ~221.0
OFF No original 51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S 81 / 2 × 11 S 81 / 2 × 11
ON 11 × 17 - 81 / 2 × 14 11 × 17
Original size
detection
sensor
Main scanning width (mm)
1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~262 ~284.4 284.5~
OFF OFFNo
original51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S A5S B5S A4S 81 / 2 × 11 S - B5 81 / 2 × 11 A4
ON OFF A3 - - - FLS FLS FLS - - -
- ON A3 - - - - 81 / 2 × 14 - B4 11 × 17 A3
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 77/569
7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
40
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Detection timing
7.3.6 Image processing
The image processing has following items. For details, see “25. IMAGE PROCESSING”.
See P.222
Scanner section image processing block diagram• Photoelectric conversion
• Analog-to-digital conversion
Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)
20 degree sensor (PS202)
Exposure lamp (FL201)
Original cover sensor (RS201)
Validates the original length Validates the original size
A2WUT2E002DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 78/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
41
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
8.1 Configuration
[1] Laser aperture [2] Index mirror
[3] Index lens [4] Index board (INDEXB)
[5] Return mirror/2 [6] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K)
[7] Collimator [8] Return mirror/1
[9] Cylindrical lens [10] Polygon mirror
[11] G1 lens [12] G2 lens
[13] G3 lens [14] Return mirror/3
[15] Laser beam
A2WUT2C009DA
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11]
[1]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[12]
[9]
[10]
[8]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 79/569
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
42
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
8.2 Operation
8.2.1 Outline
• The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with a laser beam and an electrostatic
latent image is thereby formed.
• The PH unit has two semiconductor lasers. A single polygon motor is used to make a
scan. (2 line one scan)
• To be compatible with the high speed printing system, a seven sided polygon mirror isused. The two beam array LD is used to control the growth of the polygon motor rotation
speed.
• The two-beam array LD consists of two LD elements arranged vertically. Two lines are
scanned simultaneously with two laser beams emitted from these two LD elements
through a single face of the polygon mirror.
• The “intensity balance” of the two beam array LD can be adjusted in “LD 1/2 Balance
Adj.” of the Service Mode. If there is a difference in intensity between the two LD ele-
ments, grain-like noise occurs in the print image. For details of the adjustment, see the
“Field Service” of the Service Manual.
A2WUT2C011DA
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[11] [4]
[6]
[6]
[7]
[7]
[8] [9]
[8][9]
[10]
[10]
[2]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 80/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
43
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Transfer belt [2] Photo conductor
[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Beam A
[5] Beam B [6] Polygon mirror
[7] G1 lens [8] G2 lens
[9] G3 lens [10] Return mirror/3
[11] Laser diode
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 81/569
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
44
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
8.2.2 Laser exposure process
A. Operation1. The laser beam (two beams) enters the cylindrical lens via the return mirror/2.
2. The laser beam is condensed at the vicinity of the polygon mirror by the cylindrical
lens.
3. The condensing angle of the laser beam is corrected by the G1, G2 and G3 lenses
and then reaches the return mirror/3.
4. The laser beam is condensed on the photo conductor surface via the return mirror/
3.
(1) Top side view of the PH unit
[1] Index mirror [2] Index lens
[3] Index board (INDEXB) [4] Return mirror/2
[5] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K) [6] Collimator
[7] Return mirror/1 [8] Cylindrical lens
[9] Polygon mirror [10] G1 lens
[11] G2 lens [12] G3 lens
[13] Return mirror/3 [14] Laser beam
A2WUT2C012DA
[2][3][4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[13][12]
[8]
[14]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 82/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
45
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
(2) Front view of the PH unit
[1] Transfer belt [2] Polygon mirror
[3] G1 lens [4] G2 lens
[5] G3 lens [6] Return mirror/3
[7] Photo conductor
A2WUT2C013DA
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
[7]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 83/569
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
46
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
8.2.3 Laser emission timing
• After a print cycle has been started, when the stable rotation signals of photo conductor
and polygon motor are detected, a laser ON signal is output from the printer control
board.
• The laser ON signal causes each laser diode to turn ON and emit a laser beam.
• After passing through the return mirror/2, cylindrical lens, polygon mirror, G1 lens, G2
lens, index mirror, and index lens, the laser beam is applied to the index board. This gen-
erates an index signal.
• This index signal has a function of keeping the same laser beam emission timing per
every two lines in the main scanning direction.
• If the index signal is not detected within a predetermined period of time, the machine
determines that it is a laser emission fault, displaying “trouble code: C4501 laser mal-
function”.
• The machine continuously monitors the index signal. If the index signal cannot be
detected at regular intervals, the machine determines that it is a laser emission fault, dis-
playing “trouble code: C4501 laser malfunction”.
[1] Index mirror [2] Index lens
[3] Index board (INDEXB) [4] Return mirror/2
[5] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K) [6] Collimator
[7] Return mirror/1 [8] Cylindrical lens
[9] Polygon mirror [10] G1 lens
[11] G2 lens [12] G3 lens
[13] Return mirror/3 [14] Laser beam
A2WUT2C014DA
[2][3][4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[11]
[1]
[14]
[13][12]
[9]
[8]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 84/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)
47
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
8.2.4 Laser emission stop
Emission of the laser beam is stopped if any of the following conditions is encountered dur-
ing printing:
• End of a print job
• The front door or any other door is opened.
• A misfeed occurs.
• A malfunction occurs.
8.2.5 Laser emission area
A. Main scanning direction• The print start position in the main scanning direction is determined by the main scan-
ning print start signal (/HSYNC) that is output from the printer control board and the
width of the paper.
• The laser emission area is determined by the paper size. The area of 3 mm/0.118 inch
on both edges of the paper is, however, the void image area.
B. Sub scanning direction
• The print start position in the sub scanning direction is determined by the image writestart signal (/TOD) that is output from the printer control board and the length of the
paper.
• The laser emission area is determined by paper size. However, there are void areas that
are 4.2 mm/0.165 inch from the leading edge and 3 mm/0.118 inch from the trailing edge
of paper.
4138to2595c0
Void width: 3 mm/0.118”
Void width: 4.2 mm/ 0.165”
Void width: 3 mm/0.118”
Void width: 3 mm/ 0.118”
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 85/569
8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
48
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
8.2.6 Image processing
The image processing has following items. For details, see “25. IMAGE PROCESSING”.
See P.222
Image processing block diagram• Shading correction
• Line-to-line variation correction/color aberration correction
• Detection of security pattern• Free erase
• AE processing
• Image data editing
• Image area discrimination
• Monochrome data creation
• Miscellaneous processing (improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis and
smoothing)
• BTC compression
• Input buffer memory
• JBIG compression• File (code) memory
• JBIG expansion
• Memory access coordinator
• Frame memory
• Output buffer memory
• BTC expansion
• Main scanning direction resolution conversion and movement
• Sub-scanning direction resolution conversion
• Color conversion processing (V to K)
• Embedment of security pattern
• Area discrimination FEET• Interpolation
• Gamma correction
• Error diffusion (binary)
• Screening
• Main scanning position correction
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 86/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
49
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
9.1 Configuration
• The toner supply section is composed of the toner cartridge drive section, toner cartridge
and toner hopper section.
[1] Toner cartridge [2] Toner cartridge drive section
[3] Toner hopper section [4] Spiral spring
[5] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) [6] Toner replenishing port
[7] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K) [8] Toner supply motor/K (M12)
[9] Toner cartridge set board
A2WUT2C015DA
[2]
[3]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 87/569
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
50
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Toner cartridge drive
9.2.2 Toner hopper drive
[1] Spiral spring [2] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
[3] Spiral spring rotatory direction [4] Toner conveying direction
A2WUT2C016DA
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[1] Toner supply screw [2] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [4] Toner agitating blade
A2WUT2C017DA
[2]
[3] [1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 88/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
51
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Replenishing the toner hopper with toner
A. Toner• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the devel-
oping unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with
toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,
thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated andmaintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referred
to as the auto refining developing system.
For details, see “12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION”.
• “Toner and carrier” packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as “Toner” instead
of “Developer” throughout the manual.
• “Developer”, if clearly specified, refers to the “developer” that is mixed in the developing
unit to offer a specified T/C.
B. Toner replenishing control• The toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper by the toner cartridge
motor C/K.
• When the toner cartridge motor C/K rotates, the spiral spring provided in the toner car-
tridge rotates. Thus toner in the toner cartridge is conveyed to front side of the machine
and toner is supplied to the toner hopper.
• The toner empty sensor/K located in the toner hopper detects the remaining toner
amount and controls toner replenishment from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper.
[1] Toner cartridge coupling portion [2] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)
A2WUT2C018DA
[1]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 89/569
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
52
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Toner cartridge motor rotation speed selection control• The toner cartridge motor selects a rotation speed of either low or high.
• When toner left in the toner cartridge is equal to, or more than, a specified value, the
toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed to supply a specified amount of toner to
the toner hopper.
• When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner empty sensor/K in the toner
hopper detects a toner cartridge near empty.
• When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner efficiency decreases. (Whenthe toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed, a specified amount of toner cannot be
supplied to the toner hopper.)
Speed of the toner cartridge motor is therefore changed from the low speed to the high
speed.
• The increased speed of the toner cartridge motor boosts up toner supply efficiency that
has been degraded. As a result, a specified amount of toner can be supplied from the
toner cartridge to the toner hopper.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 90/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
53
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
9.3.2 Replenishing the developing unit with toner
A. Toner replenishing control• Toner, which has been supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper, is replen-
ished to the developing unit by the toner supply motor/K.
• T/C is detected by the TCR sensor in the developing unit/K when the K developing motor
is energized.
• Based on T/C ratio detected by the TRC sensor and amount of toner consumption calcu-
lated by the dot counter, toner replenishing time (amount) is calculated.
• When the toner replenishing amount is calculated, the calculation result may at times be
toner replenishing time (amount) that exceeds the maximum volume for one replenishing
sequence (for printing an image with high density).
One replenishing sequence may not be enough to replenish the amount of toner equiva-
lent to the calculation result. In such a case, the “shortfall in the toner replenishing time
(amount)” during the preceding toner replenishing sequence is added to the required
toner replenishing time (amount) of the next toner replenishing sequence, so that the
sum of these two elements will then be supplied in the next toner replenishing sequence.
[1] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [2] Toner hopper (Rear view)
[3] Toner agitating blade [4] Toner conveying screw
[5] Toner flow [6] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)
A2WUT2C020DA
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 91/569
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
54
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Toner empty detection mechanism• A piezo sensor is used as the toner empty sensor/K.
[1] Toner hopper (Top side view) [2] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)
[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [4] Toner agitating blade
[5] Toner supply screw
A2WUT2C019DA
[3]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 92/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
55
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
9.3.3 Toner cartridge life control
• The amount of toner remaining in the cartridge is displayed as the four states, “normal”,
“toner cartridge near empty”, “toner cartridge empty”, and “toner hopper empty”.
• Normal:
The number of pages that can be printed is 7,500 or more.
• Toner cartridge near empty:
The number of pages that can be printed is 5,000 to less than 7,500.• Toner cartridge empty:
No toner remains in the toner cartridge.
The number of pages that can be printed is approximately 1,000.
• Toner hopper empty:
No toner remains in the toner cartridge and toner hopper.
The machine stops printing.
A. Toner cartridge near empty detection control• A toner cartridge near empty warning is displayed, if the toner empty sensor/K of the
toner hopper detects no toner while the toner cartridge motor runs at low speed.
B. Toner cartridge empty control• After the toner cartridge near empty condition is detected, if the toner empty sensor/K of
the toner hopper detects toner empty, the toner cartridge empty warning is displayed.
Remaining toner amount Description
NormalEnough toner remains in the toner cartridge and the toner hopper.
(Low speed replenishment)
Toner cartridge near
empty
Low speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner to the
toner hopper within a certain time. (Switch to the high speed replenishment)
Toner cartridge emptyEven high speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner
to the toner hopper within a certain time.
Toner hopper emptyToner inside the toner hopper is running out, thus toner cannot be supplied
to the developing unit. A printing cannot be continued.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 93/569
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
56
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Toner hopper empty detection• Toner amount more than the given level is supplied to the developing unit after detecting
a toner cartridge empty, toner hopper empty warning is displayed.
NOTE• The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces
the unit in the “System 2” → “Unit Change” in the Service Mode. The illustration shows
the message when “User” is selected.
• The default setting is “User”.
• For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
Toner cartridge near empty Toner cartridge empty
Toner hopper empty
A2WUT2E091DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 94/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION
57
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
9.3.4 Toner cartridge detection
• The toner cartridge detection is controlled by means of accessing the toner cartridge set
board when the upper front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to deter-
mine whether the toner cartridge is loaded or not.
• After detecting the presence of the cartridge, the machine determines whether the car-
tridge is new or not.
[1] Toner cartridge set board
A2WUT2C021DA
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 95/569
9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
58
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
9.3.5 Toner spill prevention shutter
• To prevent toner from being spilled when the toner cartridge is removed from the
machine, there is a shutter mechanism provided. When the toner cartridge is installed in
the machine, the shutter opens.
• Do not open the shutter while the toner replenishing port faces down.
[1] Toner replenishing port [2] Shutter closed
(Before toner cartridge is installed)
[3] Shutter opened
(When toner cartridge is installed)
A2WUT2C022DA[2] [3]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 96/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION
59
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION
10.1 Configuration
• The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and
developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and
cleaning sections.
[1] Imaging unit/K [2] Drum unit/K
[3] Developing unit/K
A2WUT2C023DA
[2]
[3]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 97/569
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
60
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
10.2 Drive
10.2.1 Drum unit drive
[1] K PC drum motor (M18) [2] Photo conductor
[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Toner collecting port
[5] Toner collecting screw [6] Photo conductor drive gear
A2WUT2C024DA
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
[5]
[6]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 98/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION
61
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
10.2.2 Developing unit drive
[1] Developing roller [2] K developing motor (M19)
[3] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating
screw)
[4] Developer discharge port
[5] Developing roller rotatory direction
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
A2WUT2C025DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 99/569
10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
62
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Outline
• The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and
developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and
cleaning sections.
10.3.2 Imaging unit detection
• The developing unit has EEPROM board to perform the developing unit new article
detection, developing unit mounting detection and life management.
• The drum unit has the mounting detect board to perform the developing unit new article
detection and developing unit mounting detection.
For details of each unit, see the following chapters.P-63 DRUM UNIT SECTION
P-75 DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
Model LifeDrum unit Developing unit
bizhub 652/552285,000 counts (number of field
standard printed pages)
1,140,000 counts (number of field
standard printed pages)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 100/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
63
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
11.1 Configuration
• The drum unit is composed of the photo conductor section, charging section and clean-
ing section.
[1] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) [2] K PC drum motor (M18)
[3] Drum unit release lever [4] Photo conductor
[5] Charge corona [6] Drum unit set board
[7] Toner collecting port [8] Toner collecting screw
[9] Cleaning blade [10] Charge control plate (Grid mesh)
[11] Comb electrode [12] Charge corona cleaning mechanism
A2WUT2C026DA
[3]
[3]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[1]
[8]
[9]
[4]
[8]
[12]
[9]
[3]
[5]
[11]
[10]
[6]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 101/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
64
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
11.2 Drive
11.2.1 Photo conductor drive
• The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the photo conductor which is rotated via the
drive gear.
• Drive is transmitted to the photo conductor when the triangular-prism-shaped shaft is
engaged with the mating coupling part.• The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the toner collecting screw which is rotated
via the photo conductor.
[1] K PC drum motor (M18) [2] Photo conductor
[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Toner collecting screw
A2WUT2C027DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 102/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
65
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
11.2.2 Charge corona cleaner drive
[1] Cleaner moving direction (From the home
position to the return position)
[2] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)
[3] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) [4] Cleaner moving direction (From the return
position to the home position)
[5] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) [6] Charge control plate (Grid mesh)
[7] Cleaner drive screw [8] Comb electrode
[9] Charging cleaner [10] Cleaner position detection plate
A2WUT2C028DA
[2]
[3]
[8]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[9]
[7]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[6]
[3][2][2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 103/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
66
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Photo conductor drive gear
• The K photo conductor drive gear employs a large diameter gear to enable the high-
speed monochrome printing.
• The photo conductor employs also a large diameter photo conductor.
[1] Toner collecting screw [2] Photo conductor
[3] Photo conductor drive gear rotatory direc-
tion
[4] Photo conductor drive gear
[5] Photo conductor rotatory direction
A2WUT2C029DA
[3]
[5]
[4]
[1][2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 104/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
67
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
A. Photo conductor small amount rotation control• Humidity around the IU can produce a difference in sensitivity among different photo con-
ductors. This could lead to drum memory, allowing black bands to occur in the image.
• Ozone stagnant in areas near the photo conductor charge corona reduces sensitivity of
the photo conductors, causing white bands to occur in the image.
• To prevent these image problems, the photo conductor rotates not to keep facing the
same surface toward to the charge corona for a long time.
• The time interval of this control is set different depending on how long the photo conduc-tor has been used and what the humidity and the temperature are inside the machine.
• Control operating condition
- Consecutive print:
Rotate the photo conductor consecutively for more than a predetermined period of
time.
- Intermittent printing:
The next job is started with a time interval of less than 10 min. after the completion of
the preceding job, and the cumulative time of rotation of the photo conductor between
the preceding and current jobs exceeds a predetermined period of time.
• If the above conditions are detected, the photo conductor is rotated a small amount dur-ing the standby after the completion of the job.
[1] Photo conductor [2] Photo conductor rotatory direction
[3] Charge corona
A2WUT2C030DA
[3]
[2]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 105/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
68
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
11.3.2 Main erase lamp control
• The main erase lamp/K radiation onto the surface of the photo conductor removes elec-
tric charge remaining on the surface.
• To improve cleaning performance, the main erase lamp/K is located upstream of the
cleaning blade in the direction of the photo conductor rotation.
[1] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) [2] Photo conductor rotatory direction
[3] Photo conductor [4] Charge corona
[5] Cleaning blade
A2WUT2C031DA
[3]
[4]
[1]
[5]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 106/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
69
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
11.3.3 Photo conductor cleaning
• The cleaning blade is pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor, scraping
residual toner off the surface.
• The main erase lamp/K located upstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation
removes electric charge remaining on the surface of the photo conductor. Thus the
cleaning blade located downstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation
scrapes residual toner off the surface easily.
• Toner, which has been scraped off the surface of the photo conductor, is conveyed to the
front side of the machine by the toner collecting screw. It is collected into the waste toner
box.
11.3.4 Photo conductor charge control
A. Comb electrode
• The charge corona incorporates a comb electrode, capable of conducting charging oper-ation centrally on the charge control plate (grid mesh), which enables to reduce the
amount of ozone produced.
B. Charge control plate
• Discharge occurs via the charge control plate (grid mesh), so that the photo conductor
surface can be uniformly charged.
• The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the charge control plate (grid mesh) is controlled through
the image stabilization control.
[1] Toner collecting screw [2] Collected toner flow
[3] 1st transfer [4] Photo conductor rotatory direction
[5] Developing [6] Photo conductor
[7] Charge corona [8] Cleaning blade
A2WUT2C032DA
[2][3]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[6] [7]
[8]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 107/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
70
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
11.3.5 Charge corona cleaning control
• If the comb electrode of the charge corona gets dirt, the voltage applied to the surface of
the photo conductor become nonuniform, thus image problems (bands) may occur.
• To prevent these problems, the charge corona has a cleaning mechanism that periodi-
cally cleans the comb electrode and the charge control plate (grid mesh).
• The cleaner is driven by the charge cleaning motor/K.
• To clean the charge corona, the charge cleaning motor/K is rotated to bring the cleaner
from the home position to the return position. Then, the charge cleaning motor/K is
rotated backward to bring the cleaner to the home position. (Operating time approxi-
mately 20 sec., 50 sec. maximum)
• When the power switch is turned ON or the front door is opened/closed, the charge
corona cleaner home position detection control is performed. If the charge corona
cleaner is not at the home position, the charge cleaning motor/K rotates to bring the
charge corona cleaner to its home position.
• The charging cleaner home sensor detects the position (rear) of the charge corona
cleaner. The charging cleaner return sensor (this side) detects the return position.
• The cleaning operation starts when the count exceeds 2,700 at the end of a print job
since the last electrode cleaning.If, however, the number of pages yet to be printed for the current job is 50 or more with
the count exceeding 2,700, the job is stopped and the cleaning operation is performed.
• The count method is such that a paper length (length in the sub-scanning direction)
equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.
NOTE• The manual cleaning and auto cleaning can be set in “System 1” → “Charging CH Clean-
ing” in the Service Mode.
• The default setting of “K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting” is “ON”.
• For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
Paper length in the sub scanning direction Count
216 mm or less 1
Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm 2
Over 432 mm and up to 648 mm 3
Over 648 mm and up to 864 mm 4
Over 864 mm and up to 1080 mm 5
Over 1080 mm 6
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 108/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
71
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Cleaner moving direction (From the return
position to the home position)
[2] Charge corona cleaner
[3] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) [4] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)
[5] Cleaner moving direction (From the home
position to the return position)
[6] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)
[7] Charge control plate (Grid mesh) [8] Cleaner drive screw
[9] Comb electrode
A2WUT2C033DA
[6]
[7]
[4]
[9]
[1]
[5]
[8]
[2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 109/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
72
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
11.3.6 Ozone removal
• Removes ozone produced by the charge corona.
• The ozone ventilation fan motor draws air.
• The air containing ozone flows through the exhaust duct. The ozone filter located at the
distal end of the exhaust duct decomposes the ozone in the exhaust into oxygen.
• The air, which is now harmless, is discharged out of the machine.
[1] Discharged to the outside of the machine [2] Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
[3] Air flow of drawn air [4] Exhaust duct
[5] Ozone produced when discharging [6] Charge corona
[7] Ozone filter
A2WUT2C040DA
[4]
[2] [1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 110/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION
73
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
11.3.7 Detection of drum unit/K
A. Drum unit detection• The drum unit detection is controlled by means of accessing the drum unit set board
when the lower front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to determine
whether the unit is loaded or not.
• After detecting the presence of the unit, the machine determines whether the unit is new
or not.
[1] Drum unit set board
A2WUT2C034DA[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 111/569
11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
74
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. When life is reached
• The drum unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the drum unit.
• A near-life condition is encountered when the consumption rate reaches about 87%, at
which time the L code screen appears.
• A warning screen appears when the drum unit life counter reaches the life value. Initia-
tion of a new print cycle is prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are
produced after the life value has been reached, at which time a drum unit replacement
screen will appear.
A2WUT2E092DA
L code key (The L code screen
appears when the L code key is
touched)
When a life value is reachedWhen a near-life value is reached
When a predetermined number of
printed pages are produced after
the life value has been reached.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 112/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
75
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
12.1 Configuration
[1] Developing unit [2] K developing motor (M19)
[3] TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K) [4] Developer discharge port
[5] Toner replenishing port [6] Photo conductor
[7] Developing roller [8] Doctor blade
[9] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating
screw)
A2WUT2C035DA
[2]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[3]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 113/569
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
76
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
12.2 Drive
[1] Developing roller [2] K developing motor (M19)
[3] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating
screw)
[4] Developer discharge port
[5] Developing roller rotatory direction
A2WUT2C036DA
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 114/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
77
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
12.3 Operation
A. Toner• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the devel-
oping unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with
toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,
thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and
maintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referredto as the auto refining developing system.
For details, see “12.3.2 Auto refining developing system”.
• “Toner and carrier” packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as “Toner” instead
of “Developer” throughout the manual.
• “Developer”, if clearly specified, refers to the “developer” that is mixed in the developing
unit to offer a specified T/C.
12.3.1 Developer flow
1. Toner (including carrier) supplied from the front end of the developing unit is fed to
the rear of the unit, while being mixed with developer and electrically charged bythe conveying screw (agitating screw).
2. The TCR sensor installed on the underside of the developing unit detects toner-to-
carrier ratio (T/C) during this time.
3. The developer conveyed to the rear of the unit is carried to the conveying screw
(supply screw) on the right.
4. The developer is conveyed onto the developing roller. The doctor blade then con-
trols the height of the developer brush to ensure that the developer on the develop-
ing roller levels out.
5. Toner sticks to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photo conductor.
The developer that is left on the developing roller is returned to the conveying
screw (supply screw) on the right by the magnetic pole positioning of the develop-ing roller. It is then conveyed to the front of the unit.
6. The developer is returned to the conveying screw (agitating screw) from the con-
veying screw (supply screw).
7. With operations described above repeatedly performed, the developer is circulated
thought the developing unit.
8. Part of the circulating developer is collected in the waste toner box through the
developer discharge port located at the front side of the conveying screw (supply
screw). The developer discharge port is provided with a shutter mechanism.
Mounting the waste toner box pushes the shutter at the developer discharge port,
opening the developer discharge port. Removing the waste toner box, on the otherhand, closes the shutter and developer is thereby prevented from spilling from the
developer discharge port. (For details, see the paragraphs that describe the auto
refining developing system and toner collecting section.)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 115/569
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
78
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Toner supplied from toner hopper [2] Photo conductor
[3] Developing roller [4] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating
screw)
[5] Developer discharge port [6] Developer collected to waste toner box
[7] Toner flow inside developing unit [8] Photo conductor rotatory direction
A2WUT2C037DA
[8]
[7]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[3]
[5]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 116/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
79
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
12.3.2 Auto refining developing system
• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier and the developing unit/K is
replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with toner.
• Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged, thereby inhibiting developer left
in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and maintaining stable image quality for
an extended period of time.
A0P0T2J609AA
Toner bottleTonerNew carrier
Low degree of deterioration ofentire developer
Circulationand agitation
Developing unit
Waste toner box
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 117/569
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
80
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
12.3.3 Developing bias
• The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the developing roller so that an adequate
amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the photo conductor can be controlled.
• To help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface of the photo conductor, the devel-
oping bias voltage (Vdc) of DC+AC is applied during development. AC component is
applied only while development is taking place. At any other timing, only Vdc is applied.
• The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is supplied from high voltage unit /1.
[1] Charge corona [2] Developing roller
[3] High voltage unit/1 (HV1) [4] Developing unit (Rear view)
[5] Developing bias voltage application termi-
nal
A2WUT2C038DA
[2]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[4][5]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 118/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
81
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
12.3.4 Toner density control
• The magnetic TCR sensor is mounted on the underside of the developing section. This
TCR sensor detects toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer. The reading is used for
determining the amount of toner supplied.
• The target T/C ratio is 7%.
• When a new developing unit/K is mounted in the machine, the sensitivity of the TCR sen-
sor/K is automatically adjusted.
• The sensitivity of the TCR sensor/K cannot be adjusted manually from the Service Mode
and so on.
• The detection level of the TCR sensor/K can be adjusted from Service Mode → Image
Process Adjustment → TCR Level Setting. (The setting will be enabled after the TCR
sensor/K automatic adjustment.)
For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
[1] Photo conductor [2] Developing roller[3] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating
screw)
[4] TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K)
A2WUT2C041DA
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 119/569
12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
82
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
12.3.5 Detection of developing unit/K
• A new developing unit for replacement has EEPROM board that detects a new unit and
keeps track of the service life of the unit.
A. New developing unit detection• The developing unit shipped with the main body does not have any EEPROM board. The
life counter is recorded in the main body.
• A new developing unit/K is detected when 24 V is turned ON after the main power switchis turned OFF and ON or the lower front door is opened and closed.
• When a new developing unit is detected, the lift counter is automatically reset and a TCR
adjustment is carried out.
• An automatic TCR adjustment takes about 140 sec.
B. When life is reached• The developing unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the developing unit.
• A warning screen appears when the life value is reached. Initiation of a new print cycle is
prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are produced after the life
value has been reached, at which time a developing unit replacement screen will appear.
When a life value is reached When printing is prohibited
A2WUT2E093DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 120/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION
83
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
12.3.6 Toner scattering prevention
• To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, a toner filter is installed at
the rear of the machine, and the toner suction fan motor that work together sucks toner
particles rising up during development.
• The toner filter comes together with the drum unit/K.
12.3.7 Image stabilization control
• An image stabilization control is automatically performed, when the developing unit/K or
drum unit/K is replaced with a new one.
• For details, see “24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.
[1] Toner filter [2] Discharged to the outside of the machine
[3] Toner suction fan motor (FM7) [4] Developing unit/K
[5] Toner scattered [6] Air flow of drawn air
[7] Frame [8] Exhaust duct
A2WUT2C039DA
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 121/569
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
84
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION
13.1 Configuration
A2WUT2C042DA
[4]
[3]
[8]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[10]
[9]
[11]
[10]
[13]
[14]
[12]
[9]
[15]
[7]
[6]
[16]
A0P0T2C013DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 122/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION
85
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Transfer belt unit [2] Transfer belt motor (M1)
[3] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K
(PS51)
[4] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor
(M21)
[5] Cleaner motor (M38) [6] Transfer belt cleaning section
[7] Waste toner conveying relay section [8] Pressure cam
[9] Retraction roller [10] 1st transfer roller/K[11] Transfer belt drive roller [12] Transfer belt driven roller/1
[13] Cleaning brush 1 [14] Cleaning brush 2
[15] Imaging unit/K [16] Transfer belt driven roller/2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 123/569
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
86
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
13.2 Drive
13.2.1 Transfer belt drive
[1] Transfer belt drive roller [2] Transfer belt motor (M1)
[3] Transfer belt [4] Transfer belt driven roller/1
[5] Transfer belt driven roller/2 [6] Transfer belt rotatory direction
A2WUT2C043DA
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
[6]
[5]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 124/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION
87
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
13.2.2 Transfer belt cleaning section drive
A. Cleaning brush drive
B. Toner collecting screw drive
[1] Cleaner motor (M38) [2] Cleaning brush 1
[3] Toner collecting roller 1 [4] Cleaning brush 2
[5] Toner collecting roller 2 [6] Transfer belt
[7] Toner collecting screw
A2WUT2C045DA
[1]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2] [6]
[7] [4]
[5]
[3]
[1] Transfer belt driven roller shaft [2] Toner collecting screw
[3] Toner agitating paddle
A2WUT2C046DA
[2]
[3]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 125/569
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
88
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
13.2.3 1st transfer roller drive
[1] 1st transfer roller/K [2] Retraction roller
[3] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K
(PS51)
[4] Sliding plate
[5] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor
(M21)
[6] Cam
[7] Transfer belt
A2WUT2C047DA
[5] [3]
[6]
[6]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[7][4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 126/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION
89
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 1st transfer roller control
• The machine is provided with a mechanism that presses the 1st transfer roller/K up
against the inside of the transfer belt during the 1st transfer stage. The 1st transfer pres-
sure retraction motor provides the drive for this operation.
• The cam causes the 1st transfer roller/K and retraction roller to perform pressure/retrac-
tion operation.• The pressure welding alienation sensor/K detects the retraction position of the 1st trans-
fer roller/K.
• To detect pressure and retraction positions, the sliding plate position is detected.
• In the pressure operation, a predetermined pulse controls the stop position.
• In order to reduce the first print time, the machine uses the cam that can turn both for-
ward and backward. With the least rotation of the cam, the 1st transfer roller/K position
can be changed.
• The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation
starts when the print cycle completes.
A2WUT2C048DA
[2]
[2]
[8] [10][9] [11] [12]
[3]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 127/569
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
90
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
A. Retraction roller control• At the same time that the pressure position of the 1st transfer roller/K is changed, the
machine moves the retraction roller up and down to change the position of the surface of
the transfer belt to suit the corresponding position in the specific print mode or standby
state.
• Changing the cam stop position moves the retraction lever, which results in the retraction
roller moving up or down.
• The retraction roller is driven by the cam.
[1] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K
(PS51)
[2] Sliding plate
[3] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor
(M21)
[4] Cam
[5] Retraction roller [6] Roller pressure/retraction
[7] 1st transfer roller/K [8] Retraction roller (When pressed)
[9] 1st transfer roller/K (When pressed) [10] Transfer belt
[11] Retraction roller (When retracted) [12] 1st transfer roller/K (When retracted)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 128/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION
91
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
13.3.2 Transfer belt cleaning
• To scrape residual toner off the surface of the transfer belt, the transfer belt is provided
with cleaning brush 1 and 2.
• Cleaning brush 1 and 2 are a rotary brush. To enhance its ability to scrape residual toner
off the surface of the transfer belt, the brush is turned in a direction opposite to that of the
transfer belt. The cleaner motor provides the drive for this system.
• During a print cycle, an image stabilization operation, the 2nd transfer roller cleaning,
and other states whenever the transfer belt operates.
• The waste toner conveyance screw conveys waste toner collected by the cleaning brush
1 and 2 to the front side of the machine.
• Waste toner is conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section from the toner col-
lecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw. Then it is col-
lected into the waste toner box. (For details, see “15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION”.)
• The toner collecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw of
the transfer belt unit is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the transfer belt unit
pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port. Remov-
ing the transfer belt unit, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby pre-
vented from spilling from the toner collecting port.
[1] Transfer belt [2] Cleaning brush 1
[3] Toner collecting roller 1 [4] Toner collecting roller 2
[5] Toner collecting screw [6] Cleaning brush 2
[7] Transfer belt rotatory direction [8] Shutter (Closed)
[9] Shutter (Opened) [10] Toner flow
A2WUT2C049DA
[9]
[10]
[8]
[7]
[2] [1]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 129/569
13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
92
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
13.3.3 Image stabilization control
• An image stabilization control sequence is automatically performed when a new transfer
belt unit is mounted in the machine and the retraction of new transfer belt unit is carried
out from the service mode.
• For details, see “24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 130/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION
93
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION
14.1 Configuration
A2WUT2C050DA[8]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[9]
[2] [1]
[7]
[5]
A0P0T2C016DA A0P0T2C015DA
Temperature/humidity sensor(TEM/HUMS)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 131/569
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
94
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
[1] 2nd transfer section (Front view) [2] Charge neutralizing needle
[3] 2nd transfer roller [4] Shutter
[5] Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) [6] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
[7] 2nd transfer section (Rear view) [8] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)
[9] Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 132/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION
95
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
14.2 Drive
14.2.1 Pressure/retraction drive
14.2.2 2nd transfer roller drive
A2WUT2C051DA
2nd transfer pressure retractionmotor (M3)
IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)
Cam
Pressure lever
Shutter
2nd transfer roller
[1] Transfer belt drive roller [2] 2nd transfer roller
[3] Transfer belt [4] Transfer belt drive roller rotatory direction
[5] Transfer belt rotatory direction [6] 2nd transfer roller rotatory direction
A2WUT2C052DA
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[5]
[5]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 133/569
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
96
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 2nd transfer roller control
A. 2nd transfer roller pressure/retraction• The 2nd transfer roller has a pressure/retraction mechanism which presses to and
retracts from the transfer belt so the patterns made on the transfer belt except by print-
ing, such as detection pattern creation during image stabilization operation, will not affect
the 2nd transfer roller.• The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation
starts when the print cycle completes.
• Pressure/retraction operation
1. Drive from the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is transmitted to the drive
gear.
2. The drive gear rotates to rotate the cam. Pressing down the pressure lever will
press the 2nd transfer roller against the transfer belt.
3. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the 2nd transfer
roller reaches the pressure position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is
stopped.
4. The cam rotates further when the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor turns ON
again. Releasing the pressure lever will move the 2nd transfer roller to the retrac-
tion position. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the
roller reaches the retraction position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is
stopped.
A0P0T2C017DA
4036ma2168c0 4036ma2023c1
2nd transferroller
Cam
When retracted When pressed
Drive roller
2nd transferroller
Cam
2nd transfer pressureretraction motor (M3)
Pressure welding alienationsensor (PS50)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 134/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION
97
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
14.3.2 2nd transfer control
• The toner on the transfer belt is transferred onto the paper when the paper is transported
between the transfer belt and the 2nd transfer roller.
• To adjust the 2nd transfer output to the correct voltage, ATVC system is installed.
A constant current is output to the 2nd transfer roller to measure voltage. The measured
voltage is corrected to be used for automatic adjustment of the 2nd transfer output volt-
age.
• The ATVC operation is performed after the power switch is turned ON. (Mainly just before
image stabilization operation)
Or, it is performed before the machine starts a print cycle for the first time after the tem-
perature change inside the machine went over the threshold.
• Overview of ATVC operation
Constant current
2nd transfer roller
Transfer belt
Transfer belt drive roller
HV2
Output a constant current to the 2ndtransfer roller.
Calculate the resistance value of the2nd transfer roller.
Determine the 2nd transfer outputvoltage.
Printer control board (PRCB)
Measures the voltage
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 135/569
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
98
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
14.3.3 2nd transfer roller cleaning
• To remove residual toner off the surface of the 2nd transfer roller, a +/- DC bias is applied
alternately to the roller, thereby moving the residual toner to the surface of the transfer
belt.
• The cleaning brush then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the transfer belt.
A. Cleaning operation timing• The sequence is carried when the power switch are turned ON or each door is opened
and closed when a print cycle has been abnormally terminated due to a misfeed or anoccurrence of the malfunction.
• The sequence is carried out at the end of a print cycle, if the cumulative count since the
preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence exceeds 300 during the print cycle.
• If the cumulative count since the preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence
exceeds 3,000 during a print cycle, the print cycle is interrupted and the cleaning
sequence is carried out. The print cycle is resumed as soon as the cleaning sequence is
completed.
[1] Residual toner [2] The residual toner is transferred to the
transfer belt
[3] The residual toner is transferred [4] The residual toner is collected
[5] Cleaning brush 1 [6] Cleaning brush 2
[7] Transfer belt [8] 2nd transfer roller
A2WUT2C053DA
[5]
[6]
[8]
[9]
[1]
[4]
[7]
[2][3]
Paper length in the sub scanning direction Count
216 mm or less 1
Over 216 mm 2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 136/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION
99
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
14.3.4 Paper separation control
• The charge neutralizing needle is provided to prevent the paper from being wound
around the transfer belt.
• The charge neutralizing needle is located downstream of the 2nd transfer roller in the
paper feeding direction.
• A negative charge, which is the reverse polarity to the positive output from the 2nd trans-
fer roller, to the charge neutralizing needle to remove electric charge remaining on the
paper which has undergone the 2nd transfer stage.
• The output of the charge neutralizing needle is switched automatically using the high
voltage unit/2 according to the paper type and the environmental conditions, and whether
the print cycle is for printing the 1st side or 2nd.
• In order to separate thin paper or curled paper caused by 2-sided printing from the trans-
fer belt without fail after the 2nd transfer, transfer belt separator claws are mounted at 3
places.
[1] Paper separator claws [2] Transfer belt
[3] 2nd transfer roller [4] Charge neutralizing needle
A2WUT2C054DA
[2]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 137/569
14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
100
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
14.3.5 Sensor protection
• The IDC sensor can be contaminated with toner since it is located under the transfer belt.
There is a shutter mechanism provided for the sensor to prevent it from being contami-
nated.
• The shutter is closed and opened in time with the 2nd transfer roller being pressed and
retracted. When the 2nd transfer roller is retracted, the pressure pin presses the shutter
holder, causing the shutter at the IDC sensor section to move to the front side.
• When the 2nd transfer roller is pressed, on the other hand, the shutter at the IDC sensor
section is moved to the rear by the spring force and closed.
2nd transfer roller Shutter
Retracted Open
Pressed Closed
[1] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) [2] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)
[3] Shutter [4] Pressure pin
[5] Shutter holder [6] Shutter (Opened)
[7] Shutter (Closed)
A2WUT2C055DA
[2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 138/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
101
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
15.1 Configuration
• The toner collecting section is composed of the waste toner box and waste toner convey-
ing relay section.
A2WUT2C056DA
[4]
[10]
[8][9]
[1][2]
[2]
[15]
[14]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[13][12]
[11]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 139/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
102
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Waste toner box (Front view) [2] Waste toner collecting port (Drum unit)
[3] Transfer belt cleaning section [4] Waste toner conveying relay section
[5] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor
(PS23)
[6] Agitating screw/1
[7] Agitating screw/2 [8] Paddle
[9] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer beltunit)
[10] Waste toner box (Rear view)
[11] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53) [12] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-
ing unit)
[13] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [14] Waste toner relay screw
[15] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 140/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
103
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
15.2 Drive
• The agitating paddle and waste toner relay screw in the waste toner conveying relay sec-
tion are driven and rotated by the waste toner agitating motor.
• The agitating screw 1/2 in the waste toner box is driven and rotated by the waste toner
agitating motor.
• The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor monitors the condition of the waste toner
agitating motor rotation.
[1] Paddle [2] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)
[3] Waste toner relay screw [4] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor
(PS23)
[5] Actuator [6] Agitating screw/2
[7] Agitating screw/1 [8] Waste toner flow from developing unit
[9] Waste toner flow from waste toner convey-
ing relay section
A2WUT2C057DA
[2]
[3]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[7][9]
[9]
[9]
[1]
[8]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 141/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
104
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box
• The waste toner collecting path is consist of the three following path.
[1] Waste toner collecting path from the drum
unit
[2] Waste developer collecting path from the
developing unit
[3] Waste toner collecting path from the trans-
fer belt unit
A2WUT2C058DA
[1]
[2]][2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 142/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
105
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
A. Waste toner collecting path from the drum unit• The toner collecting screw conveys toner collected from the drum unit to the waste toner
box.
[1] Toner collecting screw (Drum unit) [2] Toner flow
[3] Agitating screw/1
A2WUT2C059DA
[2]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 143/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
106
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Waste toner collecting path from the transfer belt unit• Waste toner conveyed by the waste toner collecting screw of the transfer belt is conveyed
to the waste toner conveying relay section.
• Waste toner conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section is conveyed to the front
side of the machine by the waste toner relay screw.
• Waste toner is collected in the waste toner box through the toner collecting port located
at the front side of the waste toner relay screw.
• The toner collecting port is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the waste tonerbox pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port.
Removing the waste toner box, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby
prevented from spilling from the toner collecting port.
[1] Agitating screw/1 [2] Toner flow
[3] Paddle [4] Waste toner relay screw
A2WUT2C061DA
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[3][1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 144/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
107
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Waste developer collecting path from the developing unit• The conveying screw (supply screw) convey waste developer collected from the develop-
ing unit to the waste toner box. (For details, see “12.3.2 Auto refining developing system”
of “12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION”.
[1] Developer flow [2] Conveying screw (supply screw) (Develop-
ing unit)
[3] Agitating screw/2
A2WUT2C060DA[3]
[3]
[2]
[2]
[1] [1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 145/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
108
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
15.3.2 Toner path in the waste toner box
• The waste toner box consists of the waste toner collecting section and the waste devel-
oper collecting section.
• The waste toner collecting section and the waste developer collecting section are
arranged independently of each other, each storing waste toner and waste developer,
respectively.
[1] Waste toner collecting por t (Drum unit) [2] Waste toner flow
[3] Agitating screw/1 [4] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer belt
unit)
[5] Waste developer flow [6] Agitating screw/2
[7] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-
ing unit)
A2WUT2C062DA
[2]
[1]
[7]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[6]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 146/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
109
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
A. Waste toner collecting section• Waste toner conveyed from the waste toner conveying relay section collecting port
(transfer belt unit) and the drum unit collecting port is stored in the waste toner collecting
section. When the waste toner stored reaches agitating screw/1, it is conveyed by agitat-
ing screw/1 to the center in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste toner in the
waste toner collecting section.
• The waste toner agitating motor operates when the “TCR sensor performs an automatic
adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1)”, “toner is forcefully replenished” or“transfer belt is driven”, and the agitating screw is rotated.
• The amount of waste toner accumulated in the waste toner collecting section is not mon-
itored. (The near-full/full detection inside the toner collecting section is not performed.)
[1] Waste toner collecting por t (Drum unit) [2] Agitating screw/1
[3] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer belt
unit)
[4] Waste toner collected
[5] Waste toner flow
[1]
[4][4]
[3]
[5] [5]
[2]
A2WUT2C063DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 147/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
110
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Waste developer collecting section• Waste developer conveyed from the developing unit collecting port is stored in the waste
developer collecting section. The waste developer is conveyed by agitating screw/2 to the
left in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste developer in the waste developer
collecting section.
• There is the waste toner box near-full detection window provided at the left portion of the
waste toner box to monitor the amount of developer accumulated in the developer col-
lecting section. For the waste toner near-full/full detection, see “15.3.4 Waste toner fulldetection”.
• The waste toner agitating motor operates when the “TCR sensor performs an automatic
adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1)”, “toner is forcefully replenished” or
“transfer belt is driven”, and the agitating screw is rotated.
[1] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-
ing unit)
[2] Waste toner near-full detection window
[3] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [4] Agitating screw/2
[5] Waste developer flow [6] Waste toner collected
A2WUT2C064DA
[5]
[6]
[4]
[3] [2]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 148/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
111
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
15.3.3 Waste toner box set detection
• The waste toner box set sensor is provided to detect a waste toner box loaded in posi-
tion. Timing for this detection is when the power switch is turned ON, and the front door is
closed. If the waste toner box is found to be out of position, the machine inhibits the initi-
ation of a new print cycle.
[1] Waste toner box (Rear view) [2] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53)
[3] Waste toner box setting direction
A2WUT2C065DA[2]
[3]
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 149/569
15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
112
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
15.3.4 Waste toner box full detection
• An interrupter-type photosensor is used to detect a waste toner box full condition.
• When the waste toner box near-full detection window located in the waste developer col-
lecting section of the waste toner box blocks the waste toner full sensor for a given period
of time or over, the machine determines that the waste toner box is nearly full of waste
toner.
• At this time, the waste toner box near-full warning is given on the control panel.
• The machine detects a waste toner box full condition after a predetermined number of
printed pages are produced after the detection of the waste toner box near full condition.
• At the same time that the waste toner box near full condition is detected, the counter
dedicated to the waste toner box inside the machine starts counting. When the count
reaches 64,000, the machine detects a waste toner box full condition and prohibits the
start of any new print cycle to be run thereafter. (The print job being run is also inter-
rupted.)
• The capacity of the waste toner box is equivalent to 160,000 printed pages as converted
at A4 size/image density 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies
depending on the image density of the printed pages.)
A2WUT2E087DA
Near-full condition warning display Full condition warning display
[1][2]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
[1] [2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 150/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION
113
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
NOTE• The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces
the unit in the “System 2” → “Unit Change” in the Service Mode. The illustration showsthe message when “User” is selected.
• The default setting is “User”.
• For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
A. Count method• The counter value is incremented according to the image density information of the print
image sent from the MFP control board.
• Calculation is based on a solid image of A4 size that serves as 100% reference value
(e.g.: A3 solid image is 200%).
• Up to about 3,000 printed pages can be produced, as converted at A4 size/image den-sity 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies depending on the image
density of the printed pages.)
B. Reset the waste toner box full display• After the waste toner box has been replaced with a new one and the waste toner full sen-
sor has been unblocked for a given period of time, the machine cancels the printing-dis-
abled condition, while at the same time automatically clearing the counter exclusive for
waste toner.
[1] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [2] Waste toner near-full detection window
[3] When the amount of developer is low [4] When the amount of developer is near-full
condition
Image density (%) Count value
0% to less than 3% 11
Over 3% up to 7% 20
Over 7% up to 10% 32
Over 10% up to 20% 64
Over 20% up to 50% 160
Over 50% up to 100% 320Over 100% up to 200% 640
Over 200% 1,280
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 151/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
114
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
16.1 Configuration
16.1.1 Major components
• Tray1 and 2 have same sensor position.
Tray2 sensor identification
A00JT2C286AA
Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1)
Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)
Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)
Tray1 paper emptysensor (PS2)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6)
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8)
A00JT2C277AA
Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13)
Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11) Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS11)
Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9) Tray2 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS15)
Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) Tray2 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS16)
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Tray2 paper empty display board (PEIB/2)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 152/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
115
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
16.1.2 Layout of sensors and rollers
A00JT2C213AA
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
Tray1 vertical transportsensor (PS4)
Tray1 paper feed roller
Tray2 vertical transport sensor(PS12)
Tray2 paper feed roller
Timing roller
Tray1 vertical transport roller
First sheet of paper
Second sheet of paper
Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)
Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 153/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
116
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
16.2 Drive
• Drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray1 and 2.
• Take-up motor drives the tray1 and 2 paper feed rollers.
• Each paper feed roller has a clutch that is turned ON when it needs to be driven.
A00JT2C286AA
Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray1 vertical transport roller
Tray1 paper feed roller
Tray1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
A0P0T5C031DA
Tray1
Tray 2
Take-up motor (M22) Tray2 vertical transport roller
Tray2 paper feed clutch (CL2)
Tray2 vertical transport motor (M8)
Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)
Tray2 paper feed roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 154/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
117
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Up/down control
A. Up operation• Paper lifting plate B is located under paper lifting plate A.
• The lifting plate drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is connected to paper lifting plate
2.
• When the drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor rotates, paper lifting plate B raises paperlifting plate A.
B. Down operation• When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling and the lifting plate drive shaft of
the tray1(2) lift-up motor are disconnected from each other.
• When the driving force of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is released from the lifting plate drive
shaft, the paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.
A00JT2C314AA
A00JT2C315AA
Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6)Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14)
Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)
Paper lifting plate B
Paper lifting plate A
Lifting plate drive shaft
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 155/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
118
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Operation timing(1) When the tray is slid in• When the tray is slid into the machine, the tray1(2) device detection sensor is blocked.
The machine then determines that the tray is slid into position.
• The paper lifting plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray1(2) upper limit
sensor is unblocked.
• Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the
tray1(2) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the
paper lifting plate has been started, the actuator blocks the tray1(2) upper limit sensor.
• Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up
motor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
• Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one
time.
• If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the
tray1(2) device detection sensor is unblocked, the up operation of the paper lifting plate is
terminated.
(2) During a print cycle• When the amount of paper decreases as the unit keeps printing, the pick-up roller will
gradually come down to unblock the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate again
to lift up the paper lifting plate.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to stop lifting the paper
lifting plate.
• The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep constant the pressure between
the pick-up roller and paper stack (paper take-up pressure) regardless of the amount of
paper still available for use.
A0P0T5E108DA
Tray1 (Tray2) Set detection sensor
Tray1 (Tray2) Upper limit sensor
Tray1 (Tray2) Lift-up motor
Tray set
Lifting completed
Paper consumption
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 156/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
119
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
16.3.2 Paper feed control
• Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same control procedure.
A. Pick-up control• The take-up motor is energized by the print start signal.
• The tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the print start signal.
• As the tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the take-up motor is
transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up roller
picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray1(2) vertical transport roller.
• The take-up motor and the tray1(2) paper feed clutch are deenergized when the tray1(2)
vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller
along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray1(2) verti-
cal transport roller.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to
rotate.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
A0P0T5C032DA
Take-up motor (M22)
tray1 paper feedclutch (CL1)
Pick-up rollerPaper feed roller
Paper separator roller
Torque limiter
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 157/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
120
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper
transport direction.
• The paper separator roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pres-
sure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.
• The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, paper separator roller, and the torque
limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
• If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the paper separatorroller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the paper separator roller
follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the paper separator roller and paper
feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the paper
separator roller rotates backward.
• The backward rotation of the paper separator roller allows the lower sheet of paper in
contact with the paper separator roller to be returned back into the tray. This properly
separates the sheets of paper.
A0P0T5C033DA
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Paper separator rollerPaper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 158/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
121
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Paper transport control• The tray1(2) vertical transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined
period of time after the print start signal.
• The driving force of the tray1(2) vertical transport motor is transmitted to the tray1(2) ver-
tical transport roller. Rotation of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller transports the paper
onto the timing roller (registration roller).
• The tray1(2) vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical trans-
port roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from thetray1(2) vertical transport roller.
• If the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
• If the paper reaches earlier than the predetermined time, the tray1(2) vertical transport
motor is decelerated to correct the timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller
(registration roller).
(1) Operation timing• Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same operation timing.
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)
Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Start key ON Timing roller drive
A0P0T5E114DA
Vertical transport sensor ON
*Tray1 paper feed control timing
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 159/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
122
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
D. Paper feed speed reduction control• When paper reaches the tray1(2) paper feed sensor, if the interval between the paper
and the preceding paper is short, the take-up motor speed is reduced temporarily to
adjust the paper interval to the proper one.
• When paper reaches the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor, if the interval between the
paper and the preceding paper is short, the tray1(2) vertical transport motor reduces its
speed or stops in order to adjust the paper interval to the proper one.
• Paper from the tray1 and tray2 is transported at the same speed with the system speed.• If the second sheet of paper reaches the paper feed sensor during the paper take-up
sequence for the first sheet of paper, the system determines that there is a double feed
occurring and the speed of the paper feed roller (take-up motor) is reduced during the
take-up of the second sheet of paper to ensure that there is a good distance between the
two sheets of paper.
A00JT2C317AA
Preceding paper
Paper to be controlled
Sensor
Paper interval
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 160/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
123
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
E. Downstream exit control during multi-print cycle• The following terms are used for convenience’ sake throughout this chapter.
Upstream: Refers to the source side of paper supply relative to the paper feeding direc-
tion
Downstream: Refers to the destination side of paper transport relative to the paper feed-
ing direction
• If a paper misfeed occurs at the paper feed section which is upstream in paper transport,
the print cycle is not brought to an immediate stop; rather, the machine allows a sheet ofpaper, for which the print cycle is to be completed at a downstream side, to continue
undergoing the current print cycle and feeds the printed page out after completion of the
current print cycle.
(1) Types of paper misfeed governed by downstream exit control
(2) Paper pass
Misfeed at tray1 Misfeed at bypass paper feed section
Misfeed at tray2 Misfeed at LCT paper feed section
Misfeed at tray3 Misfeed at vertical transport section
Misfeed at tray4
A00JT2C245AA
Paper exit section
Switchback rollerADU transport roller 1
Timing roller
ADU transport roller 3
Transport sensor/2 (PS48)
ADU transport roller 4
ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47)
ADU transport roller 2
Duplex section
Fusing section
Registrationsection
Transfer section
Paper feed section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 161/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
124
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
(3) 1-sided printing
Operation 1
• In consecutive 1-sided printing, 4th sheet causes a jam-
ming at the paper feed tray section.
• 1st sheet after an image transfer is remained at the fusing
section and the paper exit section.
• 2nd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the ver-
tical conveyance section and the registration section.
• 3rd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the
paper feed section and the vertical conveyance section.
Sheet before a 1-sidedimage transfer
Sheet after a 1-sidedimage transfer
JammingA0P0T5E110DA
Operation 2
• Feed and convey 4th sheet is stopped.
• Exit 1st sheet.
• Transfer/fuse images on 2nd sheet.
• Convey 3rd sheet to transfer images.
A0P0T5C078DA
Operation 2
• Exit 2nd sheet.
• Fuse 3rd sheet to exit paper.
A0P0T5C079DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 162/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
125
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
(4) 2-sided printing
Operation 4
• Open a cover over the duplex section to remove 3rd and 4th sheet remained in the
duplex section.
NOTE
• 3rd and 4th sheets are conveyed to the duplex section which allowed removing ajamming easily. 2-sided images are not printed on a sheet conveyed to the duplexsection.
Operation 1
• In consecutive 2-sided printing, 5th sheet causes a jam-
ming at the paper feed tray section.
• 1st sheet after a 2-sided image transfer is remained at the
paper exit section.
• 2nd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the
duplex section.
• 3rd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the
paper exit section.
• 4th sheet before an image transfer is remained at the verti-
cal conveyance section and the registration section.
Sheet before a 1-sidedimage transfer
Sheet after a 1-sidedimage transfer
Sheet after a 2-sidedimage transfer
A0P0T5E111DAJamming
Operation 2
• Feed and convey 5th sheet is stopped.
• Exit 1st sheet.
• Transfer/fuse 2-sided images on 2nd sheet.
• Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section.• Transfer/fuse 1-sided images on 4th sheet to convey to the
paper exit section.
A0P0T5C081DA
Operation 3
• Exit 2nd sheet.
• Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section to stop.
• Stop 4th sheet at the duplex section.
A0P0T5C082DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 163/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
126
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
16.3.3 Paper size detection control
A. Main scanning direction• The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of tray1(2)
CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 being unblocked or
blocked.
• Tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 are unblocked or
blocked by the paper width detection plate provided in the paper width guide plate.
B. Sub scanning direction• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or
OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on paper size detect board/1,/2.
• Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate con-
nected to the paper length guide plate.
A0P0T5C007DA
Guide
Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)
1234
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 164/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
127
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Sheet size determination• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a sheet size.
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81 / 8 × 131 / 4, 81 / 4 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13
Switch/sensor states
Detection switch/
Detection sensor
Paper size
Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)
Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)
Tray1 CD paper size
sensor/1 (PS7)
Tray2 CD paper size
sensor/1 (PS15)
Tray1 CD paper size
sensor/2 (PS8)
Tray2 CD paper size
sensor/2 (PS16)Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4
A3 H H/L H H H L
B4 H H H L H L
A4S L H/L H H L H
A4 L L L L H L
B5S L L H L L L
B5 H H L L H L
A5S L L L L L L
12 × 18 L H H L H L
11 × 17 H L H H H H81 / 2 × 14 H H H L L H
81 / 2 × 11S H L L H L H
81 / 2 × 11 L L L L H H
FLS *1 H H H H L H
8K (8 Open) S
(270 mm × 390
mm)
H H L H H H
16K (16 Open)
(270 mm × 195
mm)
H L L L H H
Switch/sensorPhysical state
HIGH signal LOW signal
Paper size detect board/1, 2 : Switches 1 to 4 ON OFF
Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2 Blocked UnblockedTray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 165/569
16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
128
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
16.3.4 Remaining paper detection control
A. Paper near-empty detection• The tray1(2) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.
• As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the
lifting plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.
• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) near
empty sensor is blocked, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
B. Paper empty detection• The tray1(2) empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
• As paper is consumed, the position of the empty detection actuator provided beside the
paper feed roller is raised.
• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) empty
sensor is blocked, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
A00JT2C311AA
A near-empty condition
Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11)
Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)
A00JT2C312AA
An empty condition
Tray1 paper empty sensor (PS2)Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS10)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 166/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)
129
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Remaining paper level display• The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and
by the screen of the control panel.
• The following shows how the level is displayed.
*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode − System 1 −
Machine State LED Setting − Paper Remainder.
16.3.5 Paper temperature detection control
• Paper temperature is detected as the machine interior temperature detected at the paper
feed section by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section.
• The machine interior temperature at the paper feed section is used as data for controllingthe fusing temperature during printing. For “temperature control during printing”, see the
fusing section.
Tray condition Empty Near emptyOther statuses
(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)
LED ON Blinking *1 OFF
A00JT2C269AA
Tray1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1)
Tray2 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/2)
A0P0T5C009DA
Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 167/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
130
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
17.1 Configuration
17.1.1 Major components (tray3)
A0P0T5C073DA
A00JT2C300AA
Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS20)
Tray3 near empty sensor (PS22)
Tray3 paper feed section
Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19)
Horizontal transport section (upper section)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 168/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
131
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.1.2 Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)
Tray3 horizontal transport sectionTray4 paper feed section
A0P0T5C072DA
A0P0T5C011DA
Intermediate roller
Horizontal transport roller 1
Horizontaltransportroller 2
Horizontal transportclutch (CL3)
Transport motor (M25)
Vertical transport motor (M26)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 169/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
132
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17.1.3 Major components (tray4)
A00JT2C294AA
Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26)
Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25) Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)
A00JT2C276AA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 170/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
133
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.1.4 Layout of sensors and rollers
A00JT2C227AA
Intermediate roller
Tray2 verticaltransport roller
Tray1 verticaltransport roller
OHP detect sensor(PS40)
Timing roller sensor(PS38)
Timing roller
Intermediate roller sensor
(PS28)
Horizontal transport roller 2
Tray4 vertical transport roller
Tray4 paper feed roller
Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
Tray3 transport roller
Tray3 paper feed roller
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26)
Horizontal transport roller 1
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 171/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
134
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17.2 Drive
17.2.1 Tray3
17.2.2 Tray3 horizontal transport
A00JT2C301AA
Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5)
Tray3
Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)
Transport motor (M25)
Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)
Tray3 paper feed roller
Coupling
Tray3 transport roller
Tray3 take-up axis
A0P0T5C091DA
Vertical transport motor (M26)
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
Transport motor (M25)
Intermediate roller
Horizontal transport roller 2
Horizontal transport roller 1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 172/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
135
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.2.3 Tray4
A00JT2C295AA
Tray4 paper feed roller
Tray4
Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7)
Transport motor (M25)
Tray4 lift-up motor (M24)
Tray4 transport roller
Coupling
Tray4 take-up axis
Vertical transport motor (M26)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 173/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
136
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17.3 Operation
17.3.1 Up/down control
• The same control procedure applies to tray3 and tray4.
A. Up operation• A lifting cable is connected to the paper lifting plate and the paper plate is held in the hor-
izontal position by the take-up axis.
• When the tray3(4) lift-up motor is energized, the take-up axis takes up the cable tothereby raise the paper plate.
B. Down operation• When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the tray3(4) lift-up motor and the
take-up axis are disconnected from each other.
• When the driving force of the tray3(4) lift-up motor is released from the hoisting axis, the
paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.
A00JT2C305AA
Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) Coupling
Take-up axis
Paper lifting plate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 174/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
137
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Operation timing(1) When the tray is slid in• When the tray is slid in, the drawer connector of tray3(4) is connected. The machine then
determines that the tray is slid in position.
• The paper plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray3(4) upper limit sen-
sor is unblocked.
• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the
tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the
paper lifting plate has been started, the actuator blocks the tray3(4) upper limit sensor.
• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up
motor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
• Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one
time.
• If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the
tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected, the machine determines that the tray has
been slid out and terminates the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
A0P0T5C012DA
Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22) Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
Actuator
Actuator
A0P0T5C013DA
Drawer connector
4038T2C141AA
Tray3, Tray4 Drawer connector
Tray3, Tray4 upper limit sensor
Tray3, Tray4 Lift-up motor
Tray set
Lifting completed
Paper consumption
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 175/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
138
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
(2) During printing• As paper is consumed, the pick-up roller gradually lowers and the tray3(4) upper limit
sensor is unblocked.
• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the
tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper plate.
• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the
paper lifting plate has been started, the actuator blocks the tray3(4) upper limit sensor.
• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-upmotor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.
• The above operations are repeated, so that the pressure (paper feed pressure) of the
pick-up roller and paper are kept at a constant value at all times without being affected by
the amount of paper still available for use.
A00JT2C296AA
Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22)
Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)
Actuator
Actuator
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 176/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
139
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.2 Paper Feed control
A. Pick-up control (tray3)• The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.
• The tray3 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the print start signal.
• As the tray3 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up roller
picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray3 transport roller.
• The tray3 transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time
after sending out the print start signal.
• As the tray3 transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
transmitted to the tray3 transport roller. As a result, the tray3 transport roller transports a
sheet of paper onto the horizontal transport roller.
• In consecutive printing, if the horizontal transport sensor has not detected the arrival of a
preceded paper, the tray3 transport roller will be stopped temporarily and the interval
between a preceded paper and a succeeding paper will be corrected.
• The tray3 paper feed clutch and tray3 transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of apredetermined period of time after the tray3 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge
of the paper.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to
rotate.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 177/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
140
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Pick-up control (tray4)• The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.
• The tray4 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the print start signal.
• As the tray4 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is
transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up roller
picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray4 vertical transport roller.• The tray4 paper feed clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the tray4 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to
rotate.
• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.
A0P0T5C034DA
Vertical transportmotor (M26)
Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)
Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL4)
Intermediate roller
Intermediate transport rollersensor (PS28)
Horizontal transportsensor (PS29)
Horizontal transportroller 2
Paper feed roller (tray4)
Pick-up roller(tay3)
Paper separatorroller (tray4)
Pick-up roller (tray4)
Horizontal transport roller1
Transport motor(M25)
Tray3 paper feedclutch (CL5)
Paper feed roller (tray3)
Paper separator roller(tray3)
Tray3 Paper feed sensor (PS21)
Tray3 transport roller
Tray3transportclutch (CL6)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 178/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
141
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper
transport direction.
• The paper separator roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pres-
sure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.
• The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, paper separator roller, and the torque
limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
• If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the paper separatorroller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the paper separator roller
follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the paper separator roller and paper
feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the paper
separator roller rotates backward.
• The backward rotation of the paper separator roller allows the lower sheet of paper in
contact with the paper separator roller to be returned back into the tray. This properly
separates the sheets of paper.
A0P0T5C033DA
Pick-up roller
Paper feed roller
Paper separator roller
Drive connecting gear
Paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 179/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
142
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
D. Horizontal transport control (tray3)• The transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after
the print start signal.
• The horizontal transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the transport motor has been energized.
• When the horizontal transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor
is transmitted to horizontal transport roller 1 and horizontal transport roller 2. The hori-
zontal transport rollers 1 and 2 rotate to transport the paper onto the intermediate roller.• The horizontal transport sensor located downstream of the horizontal transport roller
along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray3 trans-
port roller.
• The intermediate roller sensor located downstream of the intermediate roller along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from horizontal transport roller 2.
• The horizontal transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the intermediate roller sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper.
• If the horizontal transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper
misfeed occurs at the horizontal transport section.• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper
misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
E. Paper feed deceleration control• If the spacing between the current and preceding sheets of paper taken up from tray3 is
narrow, the tray3 transport clutch is temporarily deenergized, thereby achieving an ade-
quate spacing between the two sheets of paper.
• If there is only a narrow spacing from the preceding sheet of paper when the current one
reaches the intermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is temporarily deenergized to
achieve an adequate spacing between the two sheets of paper.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 180/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
143
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F. Operation timing(1) The tray3
A2WUT2E003DA
Transport motor (M25)
Tray3 paper feed clutch (CL5)
Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)
Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21)
Horizontal Transport clutch (CL3)
Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)
Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
vertical transport motor (M26)
Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Start key ON Timing motor ON
Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ONThick paper: Timing roller sensor ON
* When there is no preceding paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 181/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
144
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
(2) The tray4
G. Paper feed deceleration control• If a paper fed from the tray 3 has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper, the tray3
paper feed clutch is stopped temporarily to control to have a proper spacing between
papers.
• If a paper has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper when the paper reached to theintermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is stopped temporarily to control to have a
proper spacing between papers.
A00JT2E527DA
Transport motor (M25)
Tray4 paper feed clutch (CL7)
Tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26)
Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)
Vertical transport motor (M26)
Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Start key ON Timing motor
ON
Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ON
Thick paper: Timing roller sensor ON* When there is no preceding paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 182/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
145
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.3 Paper size detection control
• Tray3 and 4 don’t have paper size detection function.
• To set a different paper size, press keys as follows.
[Service mode] − [System setting 2] − [LCC size setting]
• In accordance with the set paper size, change positions of the guide plates (end guide
plate, paper guide plate/front, and paper guide plate/rear).
A00JT2E533DA
A00JT2C318AA
Paper guide plate/ rear
End guide plate
Paper guide plate/ front
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 183/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
146
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.4 Remaining paper detection control
A. Paper near-empty detection• The tray3(4) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.
• As the amount of paper becomes small during printing, the paper lifting plate is raised.
(See “A. Up operation” of “17.3.1 Up/down control”.)
• As the paper lifting plate is raised, the position of the near empty detection actuator pro-
vided at the paper lifting plate is raised.
• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the
tray3(4) near empty sensor, the machine detects a near-empty condition.
• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use
becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).
B. Paper empty detection (tray3)• The tray3 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the tray3
paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25)
A00JT2C306AA
A0P0T5C017DA
Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19)
Actuator
Tray3 paper empty sensor(PS19)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 184/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
147
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Paper empty detection (tray4)• The tray4 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.
• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the tray4
paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.
D. Remaining paper detection• Paper supply level is detected by calculation of the paper remaining level based on the
time when the tray is lifted.
• Plain paper is used as the reference of the calculation for the paper supply level.
• When the thick paper is set, off set value is used to calculate the paper supply level.
Ex: When thick paper 2 is set, paper supply level is calculated as a half of the plain paperlevel.
• Lifting time is measured when the power is turned ON, save mode is released and a tray
is inserted.
A0P0T5C018DA
Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)
Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)
Actuator
Tray condition Paper full Paper near full Paper remained
Paper supply level 100 to 66% 65 to 33% 33% to 51 sheets
Tray3 paper supply level 1500 to 1000 sheets 999 to 501 sheets 500 to 51 sheets
Tray4 paper supply level 1000 to 666 sheets 665 to 334 sheets 333 to 51 sheets
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 185/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
148
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
E. Display of paper supply level• The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and
by the screen of the control panel.
• The following shows how the level is displayed.
*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode − System 1 −
Machine State LED Setting − Paper Remainder.
Tray condition Empty Near emptyOther statuses
(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)
LED ON Blinking *1 OFF
A00JT2C269AA
Tray3 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/3)
Tray4 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/4)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 186/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
149
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control
• The machine has two dehumidification heaters mounted on its frame (except for the
North America and Europe area).
• When energized, the dehumidification heater generates heat to prevent the paper stack
loaded in the tray from becoming damp.
• The dehumidification heater is energized when the dehumidification heater switch
located on the lower part at the back of the main body is turned ON.
• When the dehumidification heater switch is ON, the dehumidification heater is energized
as long as the K PC drum motor remains deenergized (in the standby state; for details,
see the table below).
• While the K PC drum motor remains energized (during printing), the dehumidification
heater is deenergized to inhibit power consumption. (Photo conductor small amount rota-
tion control is worked in standby. If the K PC drum motor are rotated in short time, the
dehumidification heater has no OFF/ON operation but hold ON status.)
*: For details, see “Photo conductor section/Photo conductor small amount rotation control”
Dehumidification heater K PC drum motorFor the photo conductor small
amount rotation*
ON Halt OFFON - ON
OFF Halt OFF
OFF Running OFF
OFF Running OFF
A0P0T5C019DA
Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2)
Tray3 dehumidifier heater (DH1)
A00JT2C279AA
Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1)
Dehumidification heater switch(SW2)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 187/569
17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
150
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.6 Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in
• The connection state of the drawer connection located in the rear of the tray determines
whether the tray3(4) is slid out or in.
• When the tray3(4) is slid in, the tray3(4) drawer connector is connected and the machine
determines that the tray3(4) is slid in position.
• When the tray3(4) is slid out, the tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected and the
machine determines that the tray3(4) is slid out.
A0P0T5C013DA
Tray4 drawer connector Tray3 drawer connector
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 188/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)
151
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
17.3.7 Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in
• The horizontal transport sensor detects the horizontal transport unit that is being slid out
or in.
• By sliding out the horizontal transport unit, the horizontal transport guide for clearing
paper misfeed from the horizontal transport unit can be opened.
• There is no open/close mechanism provided for the horizontal transport guide. The hori-
zontal transport unit cannot, however, be slid into the machine with the horizontal trans-
port guide left opened.
• Slide out tray4 and, holding onto the lever of the horizontal transport unit, withdraw the
horizontal transport unit. This moves the light blocking plate for unit position detection
provided for the horizontal transport unit to the front.
• When the light blocking plate for unit position detection is moved to a position at which it
unblocks the horizontal transport sensor, the machine detects that the horizontal trans-
port unit has been slid out.
• When the horizontal transport unit is slid in, the light blocking plate for unit position detec-
tion blocks the horizontal transport sensor. The machine then detects that the horizontal
transport unit has been slid in.
A0P0T5C020DA
Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58)
Light blocking plate for
unit position detection
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 189/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
152
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
18.1 Configuration
A00JT2C274AA
A00JT2C282AA
Bypass paperfeed roller
Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33)Multi FD size sensor/1 (PS31)
Paper lifting plate
Bypass sub tray setsensor (PS37)
Bypass paper widthdetection resistor (VR)Bypass paper empty
sensor (PS34)
Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32)
Bypass sub tray
Paper side guide plate
Bypass set sensor(PS30)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 190/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
153
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
18.2 Drive
A00JT2C283AA
Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)
Bypass paper feed motor(M27)
Bypass paper feed roller
Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)
Paper lifting plate
Bypass tray up down motor (M28)
Bypass tray separator roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 191/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
154
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
18.3 Operation
18.3.1 Bypass paper lifting motion control
A. Up operation• The bypass tray up down motor rotates forward to drive the lifting gear, which raises the
paper lifting plate to the paper feed position.
B. Down operation• The bypass tray up down motor rotates backward to drive the lifting gear, which lowers
the paper lifting plate to the standby position.
C. Operation timing(1) Move to paper feed position (up)• When the bypass paper feeding starts, the bypass tray up and down motor makes a nor-
mal rotation to move the paper lifting plate up to the paper feeding position. When the
paper lifting plate is moved up, the bypass paper limit sensor turns ON to stops the
bypass tray up and down motor at the feeding position.
• When the paper supply level goes down during paper feeding and the bypass paper limitsensor turns OFF, the bypass tray motor rotates positively to move it up to the paper
feeding position.
(2) Move to standby position (down)• When there is no print request from the bypass tray and the paper fed from the bypass
tray turns OFF the exit sensor, the paper lifting plate is lowered.
• Though other jobs are being processed, if the above conditions are met, the paper lifting
plate is lowered.
• When the sensor detects the bypass paper empty at the feeding position, the paper lift-
ing plate is moved to the standby position.
• When paper jam occurs, the paper lifting plate stops at the paper feeding position. Afterpaper jam is resolved, the paper lifting plate moves to the standby position.
A00JT2C285AA
Bypass tray up down motor (M28)
Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)
Bypass paper upper limit sensor (PS35)
Bypass paper empty detection
Paper lifting plate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 192/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
155
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
18.3.2 paper feed control
A. Pick-up control• The bypass tray up down motor is energized by the print start signal to raise the paper to
the paper feed position.
• The bypass paper feed motor is energized after the paper has been raised to the paper
feed position.
• As the bypass paper feed motor is energized, the driving force of the bypass paper feed
motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up
roller picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.
• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the registration roller (timing roller).
• The bypass paper feed motor is deenergized when the paper fed from the bypass tray is
fed out.
• The bypass tray up down motor is energized to lower the paper down to the standby
position.
Bypass tray up
down motor (M28)Inverse rotation
Normal rotation
Bypass paper upper limit sensor (PS35)
Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)
Start key ON
Paper feeding positionStandbyposition
Occurrence of the event thatmoves to standby position
A0P0T5E115DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 193/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
156
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper
transport direction.
• The paper separator roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pres-
sure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.
• The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, paper separator roller, and the torque
limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.
• If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the paper separatorroller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the paper separator roller
follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.
• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the paper separator roller and paper
feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the paper
separator roller rotates backward.
• The backward rotation of the paper separator roller allows the lower sheet of paper in
contact with the paper separator roller to be returned back into the tray. This properly
separates the sheets of paper.
A0P0T5C021DA
Bypass paper feed motor(M27)
Drive connecting gear
Paper feed roller
Pick-up roller
Paper separator roller
Drive connecting gearPaper feed roller
Paper separator roller
Pick-up roller
Paper
A0P0T5C035DA
Bypass tray updown motor (M28)
Bypass paper upper limit sensor (PS35)
Bypass paper feed motor (M27)
Start key ON
Paper feeding position Finish the paper feeding
Normal rotationInverse rotation
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 194/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
157
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
18.3.3 Paper size detection control
A. Main scanning direction• The paper size in the main scanning direction is detected with 10-bit digital data detected
by the bypass paper width detection resistor.
• Rotation of the gear provided for the paper side plate and the detection gear mounted on
the rotation shaft of the bypass paper width detection resistor results in the voltage
obtained from the bypass paper width detection resistor being varied.
B. Sub scanning direction• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of multi FD
size sensors 1 to 3 being unblocked and blocked.
• The specific position of the paper length detection actuator determines whether each of
multi FD size sensors 1 to 3 is unblocked or blocked.
A00JT2C264AA
Multi FD size sensor/1 (PS31)
Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32)
Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR)
Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 195/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
158
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Sheet size determination• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will
decide a sheet size.
Metric area
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.
220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81
/ 8 × 131
/ 4, 81
/ 4 × 13, 81
/ 2 × 13
Multi FD size
sensor/1
Multi FD size
sensor/2
Multi FD size
sensor/3
Bypass paper width detection
resistor Paper detection size
Width (mm)
OFF OFF OFF
80 to less than 115 A6S
115 to 144 inclusive B6S
196 to 225 inclusive A5
242 to 268 inclusive B5
ON OFF OFF
133 to 164 inclusive A5S
169 to less than 196 B5S
196 to 225 inclusive A4S
255 to less than 288 11 × 81 / 2
288 to 330 inclusive A4
ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive FLS*
ON ON ON
201 to 231 inclusive 81 / 2 × 14
242 to less than 268 B4
268 to less than 288 11 × 17
288 to less than 301 A3
301 to 330 inclusive 12 × 18
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 196/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
159
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Inch area
*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for Foolscap.
8 × 13, 81 / 8 × 131 / 4, 81 / 4 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13
Multi FD size
sensor/1
Multi FD size
sensor/2
Multi FD size
sensor/3
Bypass paper width detection
resistor Paper detection size
Width (mm)
OFF OFF OFF
80 to less than 115 A6S
115 to 144 inclusive B6S
201 to 231 inclusive 51 / 2 × 81 / 2
242 to 282 inclusive 71 / 4 × 101 / 2
ON OFF OFF
125 to 155 inclusive 51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S
169 to less than 201 71 / 4 × 101 / 2 S
201 to 231 inclusive 81 / 2 × 11 S
225 to less than 288 81 / 2 × 11
288 to 330 inclusive A4
ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive Foolscap*
ON ON ON
201 to 231 inclusive 81
/ 2 × 14242 to less than 268 B4
268 to less than 288 11 × 17
288 to less than 301 A3
301 to 330 inclusive 12 × 18
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 197/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
160
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
18.3.4 Remaining paper detection control
A. Paper near-empty control• The bypass tray is not mounted with any near-empty detection mechanism.
B. Paper empty control• The bypass paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition in the bypass tray.
• As the amount of paper in the bypass tray becomes small, the paper empty detection
actuator is raised.
• When the paper empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the
bypass paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition in the bypass
tray.
• Paper empty is detected both at the standby and the paper feed positions.
A00JT2C217AA
When there is no paper
When there is paper
Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 198/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)
161
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
18.3.5 Detection of bypass unit opened/closed
• The bypass unit is equipped with an open/close mechanism that facilitates misfeed clear-
ing procedure and access to the tray1 paper feed part.
• The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass unit is opened or closed.
• Pull the bypass unit release lever and open the bypass unit. This actuates the open/close
detection actuator provided at the bypass unit.
• When the bypass unit is opened, the open/close detection actuator provided at the
bypass unit is actuated.
• When the open/close detection actuator is moved to a position at which it unblocks the
bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the bypass unit has been opened.
A00JT2C265AA
Bypass unit
Tray1 paper feed section Lock tab
A0P0T5C086DA
Open/close detection actuator
Release lever
Bypass set sensor (PS30)
Open/close detection actuator
Lock tab
Bypass set sensor (PS30)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 199/569
18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
162
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
18.3.6 Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted
• The bypass sub tray set sensor prevents erroneous detection by multi FD size sensors 2
and 3 when the bypass sub tray is retracted.
• The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass sub tray is extended.
• When the bypass sub tray is extended until the light blocking plate mounted on the
bypass sub tray unblocks the bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the
bypass sub tray has been extended.
• When the bypass sub tray is in the fully retracted position, detection made by multi FD
size sensors 2 and 3 is not reflected.
A00JT2C264AA
Bypass sub tray set sensor(PS37)
Bypass sub tray
Multi FD size sensor/2(PS32)
Multi FD size sensor/3
(PS33)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 200/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION
163
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION
19.1 Configuration
A0P0T5C022DA
Registration motor(M2)
Timing roller
Tray1 verticaltransport sensor(PS4)
Tray1 verticaltransport roller
Tray1 paperfeed roller
Tray4 paper feed roller
Transport motor(M25) Tray4 paper feed clutch
(CL7)
Horizontal transportclutch (CL3)
Vertical transportmotor (M26)
Tray1 vertical transport motor(M5)
Tray2 verticaltransport motor(M7)
Tray2 paperfeed clutch(CL2)
Paper feed motor(M22)
Tray1 paperfeed clutch(CL1)
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
Actuator
OHP detection sensor (PS40)
OHP detection sensor(reflection unit) (PS40)
Tray1 paperfeed sensor(PS5)
IntermediaterollerIntermediatetransport rollersensor (PS28)
Horizontaltransport roller 2
Tray4 paper feed
sensor (PS26) Tray4 verticaltransport roller
Horizontal transport sensor(PS29)
Tray2 verticaltransportsensor (PS12)
Tray2 paperfeed sensor(PS13)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 201/569
19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
164
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
19.2 Drive
A0P0T5C023DA
Registration motor (M2)
Timing roller sensor(PS38)
Timing roller
OHP detection sensor (PS40)
Tray1 vertical transportsensor (PS4)
Tray1 vertical transport roller
Tray1 paper feed sensor(PS5)
Tray1 paper feed roller
Tray2 vertical transport roller
Tray1 vertical transport motor(M5)
Tray2 paper feed sensor(PS13)
Paper feed motor (M22)
Tray2 paper feed roller
Tray2 vertical transportmotor (M7)
Intermediate roller
Intermediate transportroller sensor (M28)
Horizontal transport roller 2
Tray4 vertical transportroller
Tray4 paper feed sensor(PS26)
Tray4 paper feed roller
Horizontal transport sensor(M29)
Vertical transport motor(M26)
Tray1 paper feedsection
Tray2 paper feedsection
Tray3 horizontaltransport section
Tray4 paper feedsection
Tray2 vertical transportsensor (PS12)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 202/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION
165
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
19.3 Operation
19.3.1 Vertical transport control
• The vertical transport section transports paper fed from tray1, 2, 3, or 4 onto the registra-
tion section.
• The paper fed from tray1 is transported onto the registration section by the tray 1 vertical
transport roller.
• The paper fed from the bypass tray is transported onto the registration section by the tray1 vertical transport roller.
• The paper fed from tray2 is transported onto the registration section by the tray2 vertical
transport roller and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
• The paper fed from tray3 is transported onto the registration section by horizontal trans-
port roller 1, horizontal transport roller 2, the intermediate roller, the tray2 vertical trans-
port roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
• The paper fed from tray4 is transported onto the registration section by the intermediate
roller, tray2 vertical transport roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.
19.3.2 Transport motor controlA. Tray1 vertical transport motor• The tray1 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray1 vertical transport roller. When
the tray1 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray1 vertical transport roller is rotated.
B. Tray2 vertical transport motor• The tray2 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray2 vertical transport roller. When
the tray2 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray2 vertical transport roller is rotated.
C. Vertical transport motor
• The vertical transport motor is connected to the intermediate roller and tray4 verticaltransport roller. When the vertical transport motor is energized, the intermediate roller
and tray4 vertical transport roller are rotated.
19.3.3 Operation timing
A. Tray1 vertical transport roller• The tray1 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the print start signal.
• The tray1 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1 vertical transport
roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the
tray1 vertical transport roller.• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper
even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,
the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper reaches
the timing roller.
• If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than
the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing atwhich the paper reaches the timing roller.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 203/569
19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
166
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Tray2 vertical transport roller• The tray2 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period
of time after the print start signal.
• The tray2 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray2 vertical transport
roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the
tray2 vertical transport roller.
• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper
even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that apaper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper
even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a
paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.
• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,
the tray2 vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper
reaches the timing roller.
• If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than
the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at
which the paper reaches the timing roller.
C. Intermediate roller and tray4 vertical transport roller• The intermediate roller and the tray4 vertical transport roller start rotating after the lapse
of a predetermined period of time after the print start signal.
• The tray4 paper feed sensor located upstream of the tray4 vertical transport roller along
the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed by the tray4 paper feed roller.
• The intermediate roller sensor located upstream of the intermediate roller along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that is about to advance onto the inter-
mediate roller.
• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off
from tray3 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine deter-mines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 horizontal transport section.
• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off
from tray4 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine deter-
mines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.
• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper
misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.
• If the intermediate roller sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time, the
vertical transport motor is deenergized to halt paper transport temporarily and thereby
correct timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 204/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 20. REGISTRATION SECTION
167
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
20. REGISTRATION SECTION
20.1 Configuration
20.2 Drive
A0P0T5C094DA
Timing roller
2nd transfer roller
A2WUT2C067DA
Timing roller
Registration motor (M2) Timing roller sensor (PS38)
OHP detection sensor(PS40) (Reflection unit)
IDC registration sensor/F(IDCS/F)
OHP detectionsensor (PS40)
Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)
Temperature/humidity sensor(TEM/HUMS)
Take-up motor (M22)
Tray1 vertical transportmotor (M5)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 205/569
20. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
168
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
20.3 Operation
20.3.1 Registration control
• The registration motor is connected to the timing roller. When the registration motor is
energized, therefore, the timing roller is rotated.
• The paper will create a loop between the tray 1 vertical transport roller (or ADU transport
roller 4) and the timing roller when the paper is being conveyed in order to correct the
skew.• Timing roller is controlled in order to synchronize the timing the unit starts writing the
image and conveying paper.
• The amount of the loop of the paper can be adjusted in the “Service Mode - Machine -
Printer Reg. Loop Adj.”. Changing the adjustment value will change the amount of loop in
the paper.
A. Operation1. The paper is transported while the timing roller is stationary.
2. A paper loop is formed thus skew in the paper is corrected.
[1] Timing roller (stopped) [2] Timing roller sensor (PS38)
[3] Actuator [4] Paper
A2WUT2C068DA
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1] Loop
A2WUT2C069DA
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 206/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 20. REGISTRATION SECTION
169
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
3. The timing roller rotates to transport the paper.
[1] Timing roller (rotated)
A2WUT2C070DA
[1]
A00JT2C222AA
Timing roller
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
OHP detection sensor (PS40)(reflection unit)
Loop creating
Tray1 vertical transport roller
PaperTray1 paper feed roller
OHP detection sensor(PS40)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 207/569
20. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
170
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
20.3.2 OHP detection
• OHP detection sensor checks to prevent printing on the paper other than OHP.
• OHP detection will be performed after paper made the loop at the timing roller. When the
OHP detection shows the different result from the setting on the control panel, printing
will stop to display “Error.”
Paper type set from
control panel
Results of OHP detection
sensor detection Operation
OHP Other than OHP Stops printing promptly based on the detec-
tion of paper type inconsistency.Other than OHP OHP
[1] OHP detection sensor (PS40) [2] Reflection unit
[3] LED remote [4] Sensor output
A2WUT2C071DA
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[2][1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 208/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 20. REGISTRATION SECTION
171
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
20.3.3 Paper transport speed control
• It controls the timing the paper reaches to the timing roller sensor.
A. Operation• The tray1 vertical transport roller, the tray2 vertical transport roller and the intermediate
roller may speed up, slow down or stop temporarily during paper transportation in order
to adjust the paper interval.
A00JT2C228AA
Timing roller
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
Tray1 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speedreduction, halt)
Tray2 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speedreduction, halt)
Intermediate roller (Speed increase, halt)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 209/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
172
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21. FUSING SECTION
21.1 Configuration
A0P0T5C087DA
Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)
Brush roller
Soaking roller heaterlamp (FH2)
Soaking roller
IH coil unit(Fixed at the main body side)
Heating roller
IH coil (FH1)
Fusing unit (Periodicallyreplaced parts)
Fusing pressure roller
A00JT2C271AA
Fusing unit
Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS/1)Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS/2)Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS/3)(Fixed to the main body)
IH coil unit
Separator claw
A0P0T5C075DA
Loop amount detectionsensor 1 (PS41),Loop amount detectionsensor 2 (PS42)
Heating rollertemperature
sensor/3 (TEMS/3)
Heating rollertemperaturesensor/1 (TEMS/1)
Heating rollertemperaturesensor/2 (TEMS/2)
Heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1)Heating roller thermostat (TS1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 210/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
173
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
(1) Configuration of the temperature detector element of fusing unit
A0P0T5C025DA
Heating roller thermistor/1(TH1)
Heating roller temperaturesensor/2 (TEMS/2)
Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)
Heating roller temperature sensor/1(TEMS/1)
Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)
Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)
Heating roller thermostat(TS1) Pressure home sensor
(PS55)
Loop amount detectionsensor/1 (PS41)
Loop amount detectionsensor/2 (PS42)
Heating rollerrotation sensor/1
(PS57)
IH coil/Main coil(FH1)
IH coil/2nd demagnetization coil(FH1): bizhub 652/602 only
IH coil/1stdemagnetizationcoil (FH1)
Heating rollertemperaturesensor/3 (TEMS/3)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 211/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
174
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21.2 Drive
21.2.1 Heating roller drive
21.2.2 Fusing pressure roller pressure drive
[1] Fusing motor (M30) [2] Heating roller
[3] Fusing pressure roller
A2WUT2C005DA
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) [2] Fusing retraction position sensor (PS59)
[3] Fusing pressure roller [4] Pressure home sensor (PS55)
[5] Heating roller
A2WUT2C006DA
[1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 212/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
175
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
21.3 Operation
21.3.1 Fusing speed correction
A. Roller speed control• In order to avoid fusing error, the rotation speed of heating roller/fusing pressure roller is
exchanged according to the paper type or the print mode.
• Fusing speed is set to 80 mm/s during standby mode.
(1) bizhub 652 fusing speed
(2) bizhub 552/502 fusing speed
(3) bizhub 602 fusing speed
Paper type Fusing speed (mm/second)
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) 310
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) + Gloss mode 120
Thick paper 1/1+ (91 g/m2 to 157 g/m2) 155
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
Postcard, Envelopes, Label sheet 120
OHP
Paper type Fusing speed (mm/second)
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) 264
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) + Gloss mode 120
Thick paper 1/1+ (91 g/m2 to 157 g/m2) 132
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
Postcard, Envelopes, Label sheet 120
OHP
Paper type Fusing speed (mm/second)
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) 288
Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) + Gloss mode 120
Thick paper 1/1+ (91 g/m2 to 157 g/m2) 155
Thick paper 2/3/4 (158 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)
Postcard, Envelopes, Label sheet 120
OHP
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 213/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
176
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Adjustment of paper loop amount• By creating a paper loop, the speed difference between the fusing and paper convey-
ance at 2nd transfer section will be adjusted. It prevents the double transferred image or
brush effect.
• The fussing speed is controlled (speed up/speed down) according to the amount of
paper loop.
• The loop amount detection sensor/1, /2 turns ON in different timing according to the loop
amount so that the loop amount can be detected in three stages.
Loop amount detection
sensor/1 (Front side)
Loop amount detection
sensor/2 (Rear side)Loop amount Fusing speed
Unblocking Unblocking large Speed-up (High speed)
Unblocking Blocking average Speed-up (Low speed)
Blocking Blocking small Slowdown
[1] Fusing pressure roller [2] Paper[3] Heating roller [4] Loop amount: small
[5] Transfer belt [6] 2nd transfer roller
[7] Actuator [8] Loop amount: large
[9] Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) [10] Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42)
A2WUT2C072DA
[4]
[7]
[9]
[10]
[8]
[3] [1]
[2]
[6]
[7]
[5]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 214/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
177
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
(1) Operation timing• It starts controlling when the front-edge of the paper reaches to the predetermined posi-
tion before the fusing pressure roller.
• If the loop amount is “large” or “average”, the fusing speed is increased to reduce the
paper loop amount to an appropriate value.
• If the loop amount is “small”, the fusing speed is decreased to increase the paper loop
amount to an appropriate value.
• After the back-edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer roller and a given period of timehas passed, the control will finish.
C. PPM control• PPM control, which allows for given paper transport intervals to reduce the number of
printed pages produced per minute, is performed to prevent fusing failure, faulty image,
or other related malfunctions from occurring due to decreased temperature at the center
of the heating roller and fusing pressure roller or increased temperature at edges of
these rollers.
• The PPM control can reduce productivity to about 40 to 90% against the ordinary 100%.
• Productivity of PPM control is determined according to the temperature of each sensor
and thermistor and the width of main scanning direction.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 215/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
178
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.2 Fusing pressure/retraction control
• To ensure prolonged durability of the heating roller, the fusing pressure roller is retracted*
from the heating roller during any time other than printing. (The roller is, however,
retracted* during printing using envelopes.)
*: The fusing pressure roller does not completely retract but is slightly pressed to the
heating roller.
• The fusing pressure retraction motor is turned forward or backward to press the fusing
pressure roller up against, and retract it from, the heating roller. When the motor rotates,
the sector gear will rotate to change the pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller.
(Firmly pressed ⇔ Slightly pressed)
• The pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller is detected by the pressure home
sensor. The retraction position is detected with pulse number of the fusing retraction
position sensor.
• When there is no change in output of the fusing retraction position sensor even if the
given time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started its rotation, it is
judged as abnormal spacing and “Trouble code C3101: fusing roller separation failure”
message appears.
A. Pressure/retraction timing
A2WUT2C099DA
A2WUT2C098DA
Heating rollerSector gear
Pressure operation (Firmly pressed) Retraction operation (Slightly pressed)
Fusing pressureroller
Pressed by theheating roller
Conditions Pressure/retraction operation
Warm-up
The fusing pressure roller is slightly pressed
until the heating roller reaches the predeter-mined temperature.
Retraction (Slightly pressed)
The fusing pressure roller is pressed against
the heating roller when the heating roller
reaches the predetermined temperature.
Pressure (Firmly pressed)
Standby Retraction (Slightly pressed)
PrintingFor envelopes Retraction (Slightly pressed)
For paper types other than envelopes Pressure (Firmly pressed)
Power save mode ON Retraction (Slightly pressed)
Heater OFF Retraction (Slightly pressed)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 216/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
179
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.3 Heating roller heating control
A. Heating control• The inside surface of the heating roller is formed with Ni layer.
• The IH coil located beside the heating roller radiates magnetic flux to the heating roller
when energized.
• The IH coil consists of two different types of coil: main coil and demagnetization coil.
• The heating roller is heated by the main coil. The demagnetization coil controls the heat-
ing zone.
• Ni layer of the heating roller is the magnetic conducting layer in which eddy current is
generated with magnetic flux.
• The eddy current generated in the conducting layer produces joule heat to heat the heat-
ing roller.
• The main coil is provided only on one side of the heating roller, so that the heating roller
generates heat from a local surface of the heating roller close to the main coil. The heat-
ing roller is therefore rotated to ensure that the entire periphery of the roller is heated to
an adequate temperature.
• The heating roller temperature sensor/1, heating roller temperature sensor/2, and the
heating roller temperature sensor/3 measure the temperature of the heating roller.
A2WUT2C073DA
[1]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
[5]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 217/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
180
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Whole area heating controlDuring a print cycle, the heating roller is rotated and, at the same time, heated by the main
coil, so that the entire area of the heating roller can be heated to, and maintained at, a pre-
determined temperature.
C. Center heating switch control• The temperature on ends of the heating roller is measured with the heating roller sensor/
3.
• When the temperature of ends of the heating roller exceeds a predetermined value dur-
ing printing using paper of a small size or in the standby state, the demagnetization coil
comes into play in inhibiting heating of roller ends and only the center portion in the main
scan direction of the roller is heated.
• When the demagnetization coil is energized, the demagnetization coil radiates magneticflux so as to cancel the magnetic flux radiated from the main coil. Canceling the magnetic
flux on the ends of the roller results in generation of heat on the roller ends being inhib-
ited.
• The heating roller of bizhub 652/602 is provided with two first demagnetization coils and
two second demagnetization coils, each provided on either side of the heating roller to
achieve even greater demagnetization effect.
• The heating roller of bizhub 552/502 are provided with two first demagnetization coils,
one on either side of the heating roller.
• Control is performed to turn ON or OFF each of these demagnetization coils according to
the paper width (CD: main scanning length) and the heating roller end temperature.
[1] Heating roller [2] Ni layer
[3] Surface section [4] IH coil (FH1)
[5] Magnetic flux
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 218/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
181
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Main coil [2] 1st demagnetization coil
[3] 2nd demagnetization coil [4] bizhub 652/602
[5] bizhub 552/502
A2WUT2C074DA
[1]
[4]
[5]
[1]
[1]
[3][2][3]
[3]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 219/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
182
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
D. Detection of rotation of the heating roller• The heating roller is rotated while it is being heated to ensure that the entire periphery of
the roller reaches an adequate temperature.
• The heating roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the
heating roller (the heating roller follows the rotation of the fusing pressure roller even
while it is slightly pressed).
• If the heating roller does not rotate while the IH coil (main coil) is energized, the temper-
ature of the entire periphery of the roller cannot be measured and thus proper tempera-ture control cannot be provided. At this time, only the half surface of the heating roller is
heated. If the main coil is energized with the heating roller remaining stationary, the roller
can be damaged.
• Rotation of the heating roller results in the cam gear being rotated. The rotation of the
cam gear, in turn, actuates the actuator of the heating roller rotation sensor/1 periodi-
cally.
• As the heating roller rotation sensor/1 alternates between unblocked and blocked states
at regular intervals, the machine determines that the heating roller is rotating.
• If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined
period of time during printing, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at theexit, displaying a corresponding message on the control panel.
• If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined
period of time during a warm-up cycle, standby state, or any other timing than a print
cycle, the machine displays the trouble code “C3102 fusing roller failure to turn” on the
control panel.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 220/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
183
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
[1] Cam gear [2] Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS57)
[3] Heating roller [4] Actuator
A2WUT2C075DA
[1]
[2]
[1][4]
[2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 221/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
184
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.4 Heating control of the fusing pressure roller
• A heater for heating is not provided inside the fusing pressure roller.
• The fusing pressure roller has the soaking roller for heating the fusing pressure roller.
• The soaking roller is pressed constantly to the fusing pressure roller.
• The soaking roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the
soaking roller.
• The soaking roller has hollow structure. Inside of the roller has the soaking roller heater
lamp.
• The soaking roller heater lamp generates a heat after turning on electricity to heat the
soaking roller.
• Heated soaking roller heats the fusing pressure roller.
• Temperature of the soaking roller is measured by the soaking roller thermistor/1 and 2.
A0P0T5C028DA
Heating roller
Soaking roller
Fusing pressure roller
Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)
Soaking roller heater lamp(FH2)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 222/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
185
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.5 Fusing temperature control
• Fusing temperature control is performed to fuse toner image properly in the paper. The
surface temperatures of the heating roller and the soaking roller are detected. The power
of the IH coil is then varied and the soaking roller heater lamp in the soaking roller con-
trolled to thereby maintain the surface temperatures of the rollers at appropriate levels.
A. Temperature control chart
*: The heating roller does not control a temperature because IH heater is OFF.
[1] Warm-up [2] Controlled temperature at stand by
(normal operation)
[3] Printing (plain) [4] Standby (normal operation)
[5] Low power mode* [6] Sleep mode
A2WUT2E101DA0
[1] [2] [4] [5] [6][3]
Time
Temperature
Fusing pressureroller
Soaking roller
Heating roller
Enters low power modeStart key ON
Sub-powerswitch ON
Enters sleep modeWarm-up completed
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 223/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
186
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. IH coil temperature control• The IH coil is controlled to allow the heating roller temperature to fall within a predeter-
mined range during warm-up, printing, and in the standby state.
• Temperature of the heating roller is periodically measured with the temperature sensor,
and the temperature change (up/down) is monitored by comparing the current tempera-
ture with the previous value.
• When the temperature in the heating roller goes up beyond the upper limit, IH coil is
deenergized.• When the temperature in the heating roller goes down under the upper limit, IH coil is re-
energized.
A0P0T5C112DA
Temperature change of heating rollerTemperaturecheck cycle Temperature checked
Temperature
Upper limit
Target
temperature
Lower limit
ON
OFF
IH coil(FH1)
Time
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 224/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
187
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
C. Temperature control during warm-up• The warm-up control is started as soon as the main power switch and the sub power
switch are turned ON.
• If the fusing pressure roller presses the heating roller, the fusing pressure retraction
motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller retract from the heating roller. (Slightly
pressed)
• The fusing motor is energized and, using the driving force of the fusing motor, the fusing
pressure roller, soaking roller and heating roller are rotated.• The main coil is energized to heat the heating roller to the specified temperature value*1.
• The soaking roller heater lamp is energized to heat the soaking roller. Heat of the soak-
ing roller heater lamp is transferred onto the fusing pressure roller and heat it.
• The soaking roller is heated to the specified temperature value*1.
• When the temperature of the heating roller reaches the predetermined value, the fusing
pressure retraction motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller press the heating
roller. (Firmly pressed)
• When the temperatures of all rollers exceed the predetermined value, the print cycle can
now be started.
• A print cycle is started if so requested. If there is no print request, the machine enters the“temperature control under standby”.
(1) Warm-up time
*1: The temperature control is provided by varying the target temperature for each mode
according to the combination of the temperature of the soaking roller and the machine
interior absolute humidity*2 at the start of the warm-up cycle.
*2: Absolute humidity: water content contained as moisture in the air (1 m3) regardless of
the temperature*3: 110 sec. or less when the optional finisher is installed*4: 70 sec. or less when the image stabilization is executed
Image stabilization operating condition:
• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more after the sub-
power switch has been turned OFF.
• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more after the sub-
power switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience of the machine interior rela-tive humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or more.
Model Warm-up time Conditions
bizhub 65230 sec. or less*4 • At room temperature 23°C and rated voltage
• For the period from a stable condition of the main
power switch turned ON and sub power switch
turned OFF to a condition of being ready to print fol-
lowing turning ON of the sub power switch
bizhub 552
bizhub 602 90 sec. or less*3
bizhub 502 60 sec. or less*4
ModeCondition at the start of warm-up
Soaking roller temperature Machine inter ior absolute humidity
Low temperature
modeSpecified value or less Don’t care
High humidity
modeSpecified value or more Specified value or more
Normal mode Specified value or more Less than specified value
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 225/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
188
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
D. Temperature control in standby state• The machine enters the standby temperature control if no print requests are received
after the warm-up.
• The standby temperature control ensures that the temperature of each roller in the
standby state is not decreased.
• For a predetermined period of time after the machine has started to enter the standby
temperature control, control is provided with the target temperature of each of low tem-
perature, normal, and high humidity modes.• The temperature is controlled by normal mode, after predetermined time from standby
control start.
E. Temperature control during printing• Temperature control is provided in order to keep optimum fusing performance with vari-
ous factors, such as the type of paper, print mode, paper temperature*, use of paper of
small size, decreased temperature during paper passage, and warm-up carried out with
a cool fusing unit.
*: For paper temperature, “the machine interior temperature at the paper feed section”
detected by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section is used
as a data for controlling a fusing temperature.
[1] Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)
A2WUT2C076DA
[1]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 226/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
189
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F. Temperature control under low power mode• Temperature control is provided, in which the main coil and demagnetization coil are
deenergized to suspend heating of the heating roller in order to reduce power consump-
tion during the low power mode.
• The soaking roller heater is controlled by lowering the target temperature of the soaking
roller from the temperature under printing or standby.
• The fusing motor is deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.
• In the low power mode, the soaking roller remains stationary while the temperature con-trol of the soaking roller heater lamp is being provided. If the soaking roller is left to stand
under the abovementioned condition for a long time, the brush roller in contact with the
soaking roller is deformed and noise may occur when the roller is restarted. After the
machine has entered the low power mode, therefore, the soaking roller and the fusing
pressure roller are rotated at predetermined intervals to change the position of contact of
the brush roller with the soaking roller. The brush roller is thereby prevented from being
deformed.
• The temperature control under the low power mode is performed so that the temperature
reaches the printable level within 30 sec. at most.
G. Temperature control in sleep mode• The main coil, demagnetization coil, and the soaking roller heater lamp are deenergized
to stop heating the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller, thereby reducing power
consumption in the sleep mode.
• The fusing motor is also deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.
• The rollers are not heated in the sleep mode and, as a result, the roller temperature may
be reduced down to room temperature. The machine may therefore require the period of
time equivalent to the warm-up time until the rollers reach the printable temperatures.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 227/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
190
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.6 Heating roller temperature sensor
• A non-contact type thermopile is used for heating roller temperature sensor/1 (hereinaf-
ter referred to as “temperature sensor”). The temperature sensor detects the tempera-
ture of the heating roller through infrared rays and controls the roller temperature.
• The temperature sensor is provided with a lens. For its structural reason, therefore, the
temperature sensor can be dirtied by dew condensation formed or foreign matter depos-
ited on the lens.
• The temperature sensor, if contaminated with dew drops or dirt on the lens, becomes
unable to detect the temperature accurately, since the contaminants blocks the infrared
rays that are otherwise detected by the sensor.
• If temperature control is provided under such conditions, the temperature sensor detects
a temperature that is lower than the actual temperature of the heating roller. Then, the
heating roller temperature is controlled based on a temperature higher than the target
one.
[1] Heating roller temperature sensor [2] Heating roller temperature sensor/3
(TEMS/3)
[3] Heating roller temperature sensor/1
(TEMS/1)
[4] Heating roller temperature sensor/2
(TEMS/2)
A2WUT2C077DA
[1]
[2] [3] [4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 228/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
191
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.7 Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection
A. Detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor• The control of detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is to
determine degradation of detection accuracy of the temperature sensor caused by con-
densation or dirt.
• When condensation on the temperature sensor is detected and the control is switched to
“alternative temperature control”, the machine displays the corresponding P code “P-32
Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure” on the control panel.
B. Condensation detection conditionsWhen any of the following conditions is detected, the machine determines that the heating
roller temperature sensor/1 lens has condensation on it and starts the heating roller alter-
native temperature control. (For details, see “21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature
control”.)
See P.192
(1) During warm-up• The difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specifiedvalue and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
(2) In standby state• Within 30 sec. after the completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature
between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller
temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts
for 1 sec. or more.
(3) During printing• During printing, the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller
thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or morethan, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 229/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
192
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature control
A. Control start conditions• Temperature control for the heating roller is provided based on the temperature detected
by the heating roller temperature sensor/1.
• If condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is detected, the heating roller
temperature control is provided based on the temperature detected by the heating roller
thermistor/1, instead of that detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/1. This
control is referred to as the heating roller alternative temperature control.
• When the control is switched to the alternative temperature control, the machine displays
the corresponding P code “P-32 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detec-
tion failure” on the control panel.
B. Control termination conditions• If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 becomes less than a specified value
during the alternative temperature control, the machine determines that condensation on
the heating roller temperature sensor/1 has been eliminated and resumes the tempera-
ture control based on the temperature detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/ 1.
• If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and
that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is not improved even after the lapse
of 10 min. after the alternative temperature control has been initiated, the machine deter-
mines that the cause is not condensation, but contamination, on the lens and terminates
the heating roller alternative temperature control.
C. Print job during the alternative temperature control• If a print job is received during the heating roller alternative temperature control, control
is performed according to the settings made in “Enhunced Security” of “Service Mode”.
Reference: Service Mode – Enhunced Security – Engine FW DipSW – Switch No. 4 –Fusing unit alternative temperature control
• If “OFF” is selected, the machine disables any print job during the alternative tempera-
ture control.
• If “ON” is selected, the machine enables a print job during the alternative temperature
control.
• The print job during the alternative temperature control is processed at 50% productivity.
• The default setting is “OFF”.
21.3.9 Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control
A. Detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor• The control of detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor (here
in after referred to as “contamination detection control”) is to determine degradation of
detection accuracy of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 caused by contamination.
• The contamination detection control is performed only in the standby state. No control is
provided during the alternative temperature control initiated by condensation of the tem-
perature sensor.
• If contamination of the lens of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 is detected, the
machine displays the corresponding trouble code “C-392A Fusing sensor contamination
(NC sensor)” on the control panel. It then shuts down the circuit to the main coil and
soaking roller heater lamp and terminates fusing unit temperature control.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 230/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
193
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Contamination detection conditions(1) Control start conditions• The contamination detection control is started if, at any timing 30 sec. or more after the
completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature between that detected by heat-
ing roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal
to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.
(2) Control termination conditions• The contamination detection control is terminated if, at any timing within 10 min. after the
contamination detection control has been started, the difference in temperature between
that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller tempera-
ture sensor/1 is equal to, or less than, a specified value.
• The contamination detection control is terminated if the machine enters any mode other
than the current one, including the warm-up as initiated by the start of a print cycle or
restart, or the low power mode.
(3) Criteria for contamination• If, after the start of the contamination detection control, the difference in temperature
between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating rollertemperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts
for 10 min. or more, the machine determines that the heating roller temperature sensor/1
lens is contaminated and displays the corresponding trouble code.
21.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature
• The machine provides protection against abnormally high temperature of the fusing unit
in the following three steps.
A. Soft protection• When the temperature higher than the control range at each roller is detected more than
1 second, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble code
appears.
• When the trouble code is displayed, printing will be prohibited.
Roller name Sensor name: code
Detected
temperature
(Degrees
centigrade)
Trouble code
Heating roller
Heating roller temperature
sensor/1: TEMS/1225 C3725
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
NC sensor
Heating roller temperature
sensor/2: TEMS/2225 C3721
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
Center of the heating roller
Heating roller temperature
sensor/3: TEMS/3225 C3722
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
Edge of the heating roller
Soaking rollerSoaking roller thermistor/1:
TH2185 C3724
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
Soaking side
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 231/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
194
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Hard protection• Next level is provided when the first level (soft protection) cannot detect due to CPU over-
run.
• The heater relay, through the printer control board, is turned OFF in the second level
(hard protection) operation to block the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller
heater lamp.
• When the controlled temperature of each roller is detected higher than the predeter-
mined value, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble codeappears.
• Through these control procedures, the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller
heater lamp can be shut down before the thermostat is activated in the third level (over-
heat protection). It thereby suppresses damage to the fusing unit itself.
C. Overheat protection• If the abnormal high temperature of soft protection/hard protection cannot be detected
due to a faulty temperature sensor or thermistor, thermostat blocks the power supply to
each heater lamp.
• The thermostat rating is 210 degrees centigrade for both the heating roller thermostat
and the soaking roller thermostat. The ratings do not, represent the actual surface tem-
perature of the corresponding rollers, since the thermostats are installed in a non-contact
with respect to each of the rollers.
21.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control
• If the temperature sensor/thermistor fails to reach the specified temperature in the givenperiod after the warm-up started, the sensor is judged to have disconnection, and the
trouble code will appear.
Roller name Sensor name: code
Detected
temperature
(Degrees
centigrade)
Trouble code
Heating roller
Heating roller thermistor/1:
TH1 195C3721
Fusing abnormally hightemperature detection_
Center of the heating rollerHeating roller temperature
sensor/2: TEMS/2260
Heating roller temperature
sensor/3: TEMS/3260 C3722
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
Edge of the heating roller
Soaking rollerSoaking roller thermistor/2:
TH3185 C3724
Fusing abnormally high
temperature detection_
Soaking side
Roller name Sensor name: code Trouble code
Heating roller
Heating roller temperature sensor/1:
TEMS/1C3925
Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_
NC sensor
Heating roller temperature sensor/2:
TEMS/2C3921
Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_
Center of the heating roller
Heating roller temperature sensor/3:
TEMS/3C3922
Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_
Edge of the heating roller
Soaking roller Soaking roller thermistor/1: TH2 C3924Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_
Soaking side
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 232/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
195
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
21.3.12 Brandnew detection
• The fusing unit is not provided with a new unit detection function.
• When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the counter must be reset to zero using
the function of “New Release” of the Service Mode.
Reference: Service Mode – Counter – Life – New Release
21.3.13 Fusing cooling control
[1] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13) [2] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
[3] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) [4] Cooling fan motor (FM3)
A2WUT2C078DA
[1] [2]
[3]
[4]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 233/569
21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
196
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
A. Cooling of the IH coil unit• The machine is provided with the cooling fan motor for cooling the IH coil that heats the
heating roller and heat accumulated in and around the toner cartridge/K.
• Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through its backside and is blown
through a ventilation duct against the IH coil unit to let it cool down. The areas around the
toner cartridge/K is also cooled as the air flows through the ventilation duct.
• Heated air flowing through the IH coil unit is discharged through the slit in the upper sur-
face of the unit. It is then discharged to the outside of the machine by way of the exit sec-tion.
[1] Outside air [2] Cooling fan motor (FM3)
[3] Ventilation duct [4] IH coil (FH1)
A2WUT2C079DA
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 234/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION
197
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Cooling of the fusing unit• The machine is provided with the fusing cooling fan motor/1, paper cooling fan motor and
fusing cooling fan motor/3 for cooling the fusing unit and the paper after the fusing pro-
cess and drawing smell of the fusing section.
• Outside air is drawn into the inside the machine and heated air in and around the fusing
unit is drawn and discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation duct.
• Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through the upper surface of the exit
section and is blown against the paper being transported through the exit section to let itcool down. It also cools the machine interior near the fusing section. The heated air is
discharged to the outside of the machine through the exit section.
[1] Discharge air [2] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
[3] Outside air [4] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
[5] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
A2WUT2C080DA
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[5]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 235/569
22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
198
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
22. DUPLEX SECTION
22.1 Configuration
A00JT2C291AA
A00JT2C275AA
ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)
ADU door sensor (PS49)
ADU paper passage sensor/2(PS48)
A0P0T5C076DA
ADU transport roller 2 ADU transport roller 3
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 236/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION
199
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
22.2 Drive
A00JT2C291AA
ADU transport motor/1(M31)
ADU transport motor/2(M32)
ADU transport roller 4
ADU transport roller 3
ADU transport roller 2
ADU transport roller 1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 237/569
22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
200
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
22.3 Operation
22.3.1 Paper conveyance control
• Paper transported from the paper exit section is conveyed to the internal duplex section
by the ADU transport roller 1 and 2.
• Paper is conveyed to the vertical conveyance section by the ADU transport roller 3 and 4
to re-transport the paper.
A. Transport roller control• ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 are connected to ADU transport motor/
1. When ADU transport motor/1 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport
paper.
• ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 are connected to ADU transport motor/
2. When ADU transport motor/2 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport
paper.
A00JT2C245AA
Paper exit section
Switchback roller
Stop position 1
ADU transport roller 1
Stop position 2
Timing rollerADU transport roller 3
ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48)
Stop position 3ADU transport roller 4
ADU paper passage sensor/1(PS47)
ADU transport roller 2
Duplex section
Fusing section
Registration
section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 238/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION
201
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Paper entrance control• The switchback motor at the paper exit section is deenergized to stop transport of the
paper temporarily (stop position 1). The switchback motor thereafter rotates backward to
transport the paper into the duplex section.
• When the switchback motor is deenergized, ADU transport motor/1 is energized and
ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 start rotating.
• ADU transport roller 1 transports the paper transported from the paper exit section onto
ADU transport roller 2.• ADU paper passage sensor/1 located downstream of ADU transport roller 2 along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller
1.
• If there is, before the current sheet of paper, another sheet of paper being transported
through the duplex part and if that particular sheet of paper is yet to reach the specified
position before the timing roller, ADU transport motor/1 is deenergized to stop the sheet
of paper temporarily (stop position 2).
• When the advanced sheet of paper moves past the specified position, ADU transport
motor/1 is energized to resume the transport of paper.
• The paper is transported from ADU transport roller 2 to ADU transport roller 3.• If ADU paper passage sensor/1 is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has detected the leading edge of
the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the duplex transport
part.
• If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the duplex transport part.
C. Duplex paper feed control
• When the leading edge of the paper reaches the specified position, ADU transportmotor/2 is energized and ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 start rotating.
• ADU transport roller 3 transports paper transported from ADU transport roller 2 onto
ADU transport roller 4.
• ADU paper passage sensor/2 located downstream of ADU transport roller 4 along the
paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller
3.
• When the paper moves past ADU transport roller 4 and reaches the specified position,
ADU transport motor/2 is deenergized to stop the transport of the paper temporarily (stop
position 3). If, in this case, the paper has a length of 217 mm or more in the sub scanning
direction, ADU transport motor/1 is also deenergized.• At predetermined paper feed timing, ADU transport motor/2 is energized to resume the
transport of the paper. ADU transport motor/1 is also energized if it has been deener-
gized.
• The paper is fed from ADU transport roller 4 onto the timing roller at the vertical transport
part.
• If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even
after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the duplex transport part.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 239/569
22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
202
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
22.3.2 Duplex circulation control
• The duplex circulation control is performed differently according to the sub scanning
direction length of the paper.
A. One-sheet circulation operation
Sub scanning direction paper lengthDuplex circulation control
Lower limit Upper limit
433 mm or more Less than 459 mm One-sheet circulation operation
217 mm or more Less than 433 mm Two-sheet circulation operation
- Less than 217 mm Three-sheet circulation operation
Operation 1
• One sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the sec-
ond page is printed.
2
A00JT2C236AA
A00JT2C237AA
2
Operation 2
• After the paper transported to the paper exit part stops at
the stop position 1, the switchback roller turns around to
send the sheet to the duplex part (paper reversed).
Stop position 1
A00JT2C238AA
2
Operation 3
• The paper transported to the duplex part is transported to
the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4) faster than the
system speed.
• It stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
Stop position 3
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 240/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION
203
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
• Steps 2 through 5 are repeated.
(1) Operation timing
Operation 4
• The image of the first page is printed on the paper re-sup-
plied from the duplex section.
A00JT2C239AA
1 2
Operation 5
• The first sheet of the paper is fed out.
• The image of fourth page is printed on the second sheet.
A00JT2C240AA
1
2
4
Timing roller sensor (PS38)
Exhaust sensor (PS39)
Gate switch solenoid (SD)
Exit motor (M4)
Switchback motor (M33)
Normal rotation
Inverse rotation
ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
ADU transport motor/2 (M32)
ADU paper passage sensor/2 (PS48)
Instruction form theoptimal paper position
A0P0T5E116DA
Stop before re-supplyof paper
One A4-size original for 2-sided
printing
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 241/569
22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
204
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
B. Two-sheet circulation operation
Operation 1
• The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
second page is printed.
2
A00JT2C236AA
Operation 2
• The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-
tion and transported onto the duplex section.
• The second sheet of paper is supplied.
A00JT2C242AA
2
Operation 3
• The first sheet of the paper is sent trough the duplex sec-
tion and stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller
4).• The image of the fourth page is printed on the second
sheet of paper.
A00JT2C243AA
4
2
Operation 4
• The first sheet of the paper is re-supplied and an image of
the first page is printed on.• The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit
part and transported onto the duplex section.
• The third sheet of paper is supplied.
A00JT2C244AA
1
4
6
2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 242/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION
205
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
• Steps 6 through 8 are repeated.
Operation 5
• The first sheet of paper is fed out.
• The second sheet of paper waits at stop position3 (ADU
transport roller 4).
• The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of
paper.
A00JT2C246AA
1
4
2
6
Operation 6
• The second sheet of the paper is re-supplied.
• The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-
tion and transported onto the duplex part.
A00JT2C247AA
1
4
2
6
Operation 7
• The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet
of paper.
• The third sheet of paper is transported in the duplex sec-
tion.• The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.
A00JT2C248AA
1
2
6
43
Operation 8
• The second sheet of the paper is fed out.
• The third sheet of the paper waits at stop position 3 (ADUtransport roller 4).
• The image of eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet of
the paper.
A00JT2C249AA
1
2
68
3
4
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 243/569
22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
206
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
C. Three-sheet circulation operation
2
A0P0T5C040DA
Operation 1
• The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
second page is printed.
A0P0T5C041DA
2
4
Operation 2
• The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section
and transported onto the duplex section.
• The second sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the
fourth page is printed.
• The third sheet of paper is supplied.
A0P0T5C042DA
4
2
6
Operation 3
• The first sheet of the paper is transported onto, and stopped
at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller part).
• The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-
tion and transported onto the duplex part.
• The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of
paper.
Operation 4
• The first sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
• The second sheet of paper is transported into the duplex
section.
• The third sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
A0P0T5C043DA
6
2
4
Operation 5
• The first sheet of paper is re-supplied and the image of the
first page is printed on it.
• The second sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
• The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit part
and transported onto the duplex section.
• The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.
A0P0T5C044DA
1 2
4
6
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 244/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION
207
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
• Steps 8 through 10 are repeated.
A00JT2C253AA
1
28
4
6
Operation 6
• The first sheet of paper is fed out.
• The second sheet of paper waits at stop position 3.
• The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at, stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).
• The image of the eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet
of paper.
A0P0T5C045DA
1
2
4
8
6
Operation 7
• The second sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
• The third sheet of paper is transported into the duplex sec-
tion.
• The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
A2WUT2C102DA
1
2
3 46
8
Operation 8
• The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet
of paper.
• The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).
• The fourth sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-
tion and transported onto the duplex section.
• The fifth sheet of paper is supplied.
A0P0T5C047DA
3
4
10
6
8
1
2
Operation 9
• The second sheet of paper is fed out.
• The third sheet of paper waits at stop position 3 (ADU trans-
port roller 4).
• The fourth sheet of the paper is transported onto, and
stopped at stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).
• The image of the tenth page is printed on the fifth sheet of
paper.
A0P0T5C048DA
3
4
10
6
8
1
2
Operation 10
• The third sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical
transport section.
• The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the duplex
section.
• The fifth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit
section.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 245/569
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
208
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION
23.1 Configuration
A00JT2C309AA
A00JT2C280AA
Paper exit sensor(PS39)
Paper exit roller 1
Paper exit roller 2
Switchback paper exit section
Switchback roller
Paper exit section
Paper exit switch gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 246/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 23. PAPER EXIT SECTION
209
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
23.2 Drive
• The paper exit and switchback roller are driven by the exclusive motor.
A00JT2C310AA
Paper exit motor (M4)
Switchback roller
Paper exit roller 2
Switchback Motor (M33)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 247/569
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
210
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
23.3 Operation
23.3.1 Transport control
• The paper exit section feeds the paper transported from the fusing section out onto the
exit tray using paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.
• In the 2-sided print mode, the paper that has undergone the first print cycle is trans-
ported onto the switchback roller by changing the paper path after it has moved past
paper exit roller 1. The paper is transported onto the duplex section. The second printcycle is thereafter completed and the paper is fed from the fusing section and out onto
the exit tray by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.
• If the machine is equipped with a finisher or other optional unit, the paper fed from the
fusing section is transported onto the optional unit by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit
roller 2.
A. Paper transport path
A00JT2C235AA
Paper exit sensor (PS39)
Switchback position
When the exit part are
transported
Duplex section
Fusingsection
Paper exit roller 1
Switchback roller
ADU transport roller 1
Paper exit section
When the switchbackare transported
Paper exit roller 2
Paper exit switch gate
2-sided transport
Paper exit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 248/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 23. PAPER EXIT SECTION
211
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
B. Paper exit control• The paper exit roller 1 is connected to the fusing motor. When the fusing motor is ener-
gized, the paper exit roller 1 is synchronized with the fusing roller and the roller 1 starts
rolling.
• The paper exit roller 2 is connected to the paper exit motor. When the paper exit motor is
energized, the paper exit roller 2 starts rolling.
• When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the exit
motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 starts rotating.• Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper onto the paper exit switch gate.
• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path
detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
• The paper is guided onto paper exit roller 2 by the paper exit switch gate in its upper
position (the paper exit switch gate is in its upper position in the initial state).
• Paper exit roller 2 feeds the paper out onto the exit tray outside the machine.
• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path
detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
• If the paper exit sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the
lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeedoccurs at the fusing section.
C. Switchback control• The switchback roller 1 is connected to the switchback motor. When the switchback
motor rotates forward, the switchback rollers rotate forward; when the switchback motor
rotates backward, the switchback rollers rotate backward.
• The paper exit switch gate is connected to the gate switch solenoid. When the gate
switch solenoid is energized, the paper exit switch gate is swung down to its lower posi-
tion (at which paper is transported toward the paper feed section).
• When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the
paper exit motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 start rotating.• When the paper reaches the specified position, the switchback motor rotates forward and
the paper exit rollers start rotating forward.
• Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper toward the paper exit switch gate.
• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path
detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
• When the paper reaches a specified position, the gate switch solenoid is energized to
swing down the paper exit switch gate to the lower position (at which paper is transported
toward the paper feed section).
• The paper exit switch gate swung into its lower position guides the paper toward the
switchback roller.• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path
detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.
• If the exhaust sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the
lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed
occurs at the fusing section.
• When the paper reaches a specified position, the switchback motor is deenergized and
then the switchback rollers start rotating backward.
• The switchback rollers rotate backward to transport the paper into the duplex section.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 249/569
23. PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
212
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
(1) Operation timing
Fusing motor (M30)
Exhaust sensor (PS39)
Gate switch solenoid (SD)
Switchback motor (M33)Nomal rotation
Inverse rotation
ADU transport motor/1 (M31)
Instruction form theoptimal paper position
Switchback motorturns around
A00JT2E531DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 250/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
213
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
24.1 Overview
• The following controls are performed to ensure stabilized print image. We call this control
method “image stabilization control”.
Control Purpose Sensor
• IDC sensor adjustment control
• Dmax density adjustment control
• LD intensity adjustment control
• Gamma correction control
• To stabilize image density
• To stabilize gradation
• IDC sensor
• Temperature/humidity sensor
• TCR sensor/K automatic adjust-
ment control
• Toner replenishing control
• To stabilize toner density • TCR sensor
• 1st transfer output control
• 2nd transfer output control
(ATVC)
• To stabilize image transfer • Temperature/humidity sensor
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 251/569
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
214
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
24.1.1 Image stabilization control chart
A2WUT2E094DA
IN
OUT
Transfer ATVC control
IDC sensor
Temperature/ humidity sensor· To be set on control panel
D MAX density Background voltage margin ATDC toner supply
OUT/IN
Toner replenishingcontrol
TCR sensor Developing bias Vdc Grid voltage Vg
Image densityGradation controlGamma correction dataGradation correction table
PCdrum/ K
Toner supply motor 2nd transfer roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 252/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
215
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
24.1.2 Overview of each control
A. IDC sensor adjustment control• Inhibits changes in characteristics of the signal detected by the IDC sensor that occur
due to changes in different functions achieved by the “IDC sensor” and “transfer belt”
(part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over
time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
• The intensity of the LED light-emitting section is corrected such that the output value of
the IDC sensor photo receiver is constant on the surface of the transfer belt, on which no
toner sticks.
B. Dmax density adjustment control• Inhibits changes in the print image density that occur due to changes in different func-
tions achieved by the “developing characteristics” and “photo conductor electrostatic
characteristics” (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of
parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
• Patterns are produced on the surface of the transfer belt and the IDC sensor detects the
amount of toner sticking to them. The developing bias (Vdc) and grid voltage (Vg) are
corrected.C. LD (laser diode) intensity adjustment control• Inhibits changes in reproducibility of fine lines and void areas that occur due to changes
in different functions achieved by the “photo conductor electrostatic characteristics”,
“developing characteristics”, and “image transfer characteristics” (part-to-part variations,
change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterioration
resulting from use over time).
• A detection pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt with a
laser beam (LD1/LD2) at a predetermined LD intensity emitted from the PH unit and the
output value of the IDC sensor photo receiver is detected.
• LD intensity (LD1/LD2) is corrected from the detected IDC sensor output data.
D. Gamma correction control• Inhibits changes in gradation characteristics that occur due to changes in different func-
tions achieved by the “photo conductor electrostatic characteristics” and “developing
characteristics” (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of
parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).
• A gradation pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt and
gradation characteristics of the pattern are detected by the IDC sensor. From the data
detected by the sensor, gamma correction data is calculated for printing linear gradations
and the LD intensity of the laser beam emitted from the PH unit is corrected to an opti-
mum value.
E. TCR control• Part-to-part variations are corrected using the TCR sensor of the new developing unit.
• A new developing unit is loaded with fresh developer. Toner and carrier in the developer
are mixed together at a predetermined ratio (mixing ratio of toner and carrier: T/C ratio).
The TCR sensor is automatically adjusted so as to detect a predetermined value for its
output with the fresh developer.
• The TCR control is performed only when the developing unit is replaced with a new one.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 253/569
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
216
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
F. Toner replenishing control• The toner replenishing amount is determined and supplied based on data detected by
the TCR sensor and print information to thereby inhibit the T/C ratio from fluctuating due
to toner being consumed during the print cycle.
• Toner replenishing control is performed at regular intervals while the K developing motor
is being energized.
G. 1st transfer output control• Sets the 1st transfer current that is optimum for transferring toner image on the photo
conductor onto the transfer belt when the toner image is to be formed on the transfer belt.
• The 1st transfer current is determined according to the “process speed” and “machine
interior temperature/humidity”.
• The 1st transfer output control is performed each time a toner image is to be formed on
the surface of the transfer belt.
H. 2nd transfer output control (ATVC control)• Inhibits changes in 2nd transfer characteristics that occur due to changes in different
functions achieved by the “transfer belt unit” and “2nd transfer roller” (part-to-part varia-
tions, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterio-ration caused by use over time).
• A constant current is passed through the 2nd transfer roller and the resultant voltage is
measured. The measured voltage is corrected to calculate the 2nd transfer output volt-
age.
• The ATVC control is performed under any of the following conditions:
- Sub-power switch is turned ON.
- A predetermined range of change is detected in temperature/humidity from the tem-
perature/humidity detected during performance of the preceding ATVC control.
- The preceding ATVC control has not been normally terminated.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 254/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
217
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence
• The following four types of modes are available for the image stabilization control.
• Each mode is executed in the specified sequence.
*: If data after the gamma correction exceeds a predetermined value when gamma correc-
tion of mode 3 is executed, mode 3 is selected and the gamma correction is executed in
the next image stabilization control mode even if conditions specify execution of mode 4.
If conditions specify execution of modes 1/2, modes 1/2 are executed.
Sequence
Image stabilization control mode
Mode 1
(New/Unit replace-
ment/Initialize +
image stabilization
control)
Mode 2
(Initialize + image
stabilization control)
Mode 3
(Normal image stabi-
lization control)
Mode 4
(Simplified image sta-
bilization control)
1IDC sensor adjust-
ment
IDC sensor adjust-
ment
IDC sensor adjust-
ment
IDC sensor adjust-
ment
2Dmax density adjust-
ment
Dmax density adjust-
ment
Dmax density adjust-
ment
Dmax density adjust-
ment
3LD light intensity
adjustment
LD light intensity
adjustment
LD light intensity
adjustmentNot executed
4
Dmax density adjust-
ment
Dmax density adjust-
ment Gamma correction* Not executed
5LD light intensity
adjustment
LD light intensity
adjustmentNot executed Not executed
6 Gamma correction Gamma correction Not executed Not executed
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 255/569
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
218
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition
• When the operating condition for each image stabilization control is met, the image stabi-
lization control is performed in the mode that complies with the operating condition.
24.3.1 In standby state
Image stabilization controlmode
Operating condition
Mode 1
(New/Unit replacement/Ini-
tialize + image stabilization
control)
• Transfer belt is replaced with a new one
• Imaging unit/K is removed and reinstalled
• Imaging unit/K is replaced with a new one
• Drum unit/K is replaced with a new one
• Developing unit/K is replaced with a new one
Mode 2
(Initialize + image stabiliza-
tion control)
• “Initialize + Image Stabilization” is selected in the Service Mode
Mode 3
(Normal image stabilization
control)
• A change in temperature/humidity of a predetermined value is
detected since the performance of the preceding image stabilizationcontrol sequence
• A period of 24 hours or more elapses since the performance of the
preceding image stabilization control sequence
• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more
after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF
• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more
after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience
of the machine interior relative humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or
more
• P code “P-5 (IDC sensor failure)” or “P-9 (Drum/Development unit (K)
failure)” is detected• “Stabilization Only” is selected in the Service Mode
Mode 4
(Simplified image stabiliza-
tion control)
• Simplified image stabilization control is not executed in standby state
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 256/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
219
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
24.3.2 Before, during, and after a print cycle
*: The number of printed pages is counted such that a paper length (length in the sub-
scanning direction) equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.
Image
stabilization
control mode
Operating condition
Execution timingTemperature/humidity
inside the machine after last
image stabilization opera-
tion
Number of print count after
last image stabilization
operation*
Mode 1 Image stabilization controls of mode 1 and 2 are not performed before, during, and after
a print cycle.Mode 2
Mode 3There is a change exceed-
ing a predetermined value.
Less than 2,000The control is executed at
the end of a current job
2,000 or moreThe control is started even
during an execution of a job
Mode 4
There is not a change
exceeding a predetermined
value.
Less than 2,000 The control is not executed
2,000 or moreThe control is started even
during an execution of a job
Paper length in the sub scanning direction Count
216 mm or less 1
Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm or less 2
Over 432 mm and up to 648 mm or less 3
Over 648 mm and up to 864 mm or less 4
Over 864 mm and up to 1080 mm or less 5
Over 1080 mm 6
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 257/569
24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
220
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
24.4 Utility/ Service Mode
24.4.1 Expert Adjustment
• Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the expert adjustment.
For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
24.4.2 Service Mode
• Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the service mode.
For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.
Utility Remarks
Adminis-trator
Settings
SystemSettings
ExpertAdjust-
ment
ImageStabiliza-
tion
Initialize + Imagestabilization
Image stabilization control mode 2 isexecuted
Image stabiliza-
tion only
Image stabilization control mode 3 is
executed
Grada-
tion
Adjust-
ment
Image stabiliza-
tion only
Image stabilization control mode 3 is
executed
Copy
Service Mode Remarks
Machine LD adjustment LD Timing Adj.
LD 1/2 Balance Adj.
Image Process
Adjustment
Max Image Den-
sity Adj.
Copy
Printer
Image Background Adj.
Stabilizer Initialize + Image stabili-zation
Image stabilization control mode 2 isexecuted
Image stabilization only Image stabilization control mode 3 is
executed
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 258/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL
221
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
24.5 Image stabilization control operating time
• bizhub 652/602
• bizhub 552/502
States Time
Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control) 11.9 sec
Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control) 11.9 sec
Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control) 8.9 sec
Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control) 5.1 sec
States Time
Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control) 13.5 sec
Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control) 13.5 sec
Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control) 10.0 sec
Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control) 5.6 sec
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 259/569
25. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
222
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
25. IMAGE PROCESSING
25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram
• The following detail the image processing operations performed by the scanner section.
1. A reduction type CCD sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and
convert the optical data to a corresponding electric signal. To make data process-
ing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for even-
numbered pixels and the other for odd-numbered pixels.2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD sensor chips are synthe-
sized to form a single string of signal data which is in turn converted to 10-bit digital
signals (1024 gradation levels).
• The image data is transmitted to MFP board on the write section through the interface
cable.
1. Photoelectric conversion
2. Analog-to-digital conversion
CCD board
To the MFP board
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 260/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 25. IMAGE PROCESSING
223
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
25.2 Write section image processing block diagram
From scanner section
1. Shading correction
2. Line-to-line variationcorrection/coloraberration correction
3. Detection of security pattern
4. Free erase
6. Image data editing
7. Image area discrimination
8. Monochrome data creation
9. Miscellaneous processing(improved reproduction ofblack text, edge emphasis,and
smoothing)
10. BTC compression
11. Input buffer memory
12. JBIG compression
13. File (code) memory RAM:2GB (standard)
HDD:250GB (standard)
14. JBIG expansion
15. Memory access coordinator
16. Frame memory
MFP board
Mode other thanphoto
17. Output buffer memory
18. BTC expansion
19. Resolution conversion
processing in the main scanning direction/move ment processing
20. Resolution conversion processing in the sub
scanning direction
21. Color conversion processing V to K
22. Embedment of security pattern
23. Area discrimination FEET
24. Interpolation
25. Gamma correctionGamma correction
26. Error diffusion (binary)
27. Screening
28. Main scanning positioncorrectionSpeed conversion
Modulation
To PH unit
5. AE processing
A2WUT2E095DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 261/569
25. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
224
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
• The following describe details of image processing.
1. Correct variations in reading caused by pixel-to-pixel variations in sensitivity of the
CCD sensor and uneven light distribution by the exposure lamp. A peak-hold-type
shading correction is performed, in which the maximum value of two or more read-
ings of two or more lines is taken to prevent effect due to dust or dirt on the shading
sheet.
2. To correct differences in the position of each chip of CCD sensors R, G, and B,
FIFO memory is adopted to match the output timing. Also correct color aberrationof the lens.
3. The security pattern created during printing on this machine is detected and copy-
ing is enabled or disabled through a password (when the security kit SC-507 is
mounted).
4. If outer document elimination is selected from the control panel, document area
determination processing is performed for each line within the document area data
acquired during prescan. Then, the START and END positions of the document
area in the main scanning direction are detected and the area outside the START
and END positions is erased as the outside-the-document area.
5. A histogram of lightness for AE processing is generated. The AE level of the docu-ment is determined based on this histogram and AE processing is performed.
6. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjust-
ments of saturation, lightness, and hue.
7. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a
continuous gradation area, is discriminated.
8. Monochrome data is created.
9. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text,
edge emphasis and smoothing.
10. Each Image data of R, G, and B is compressed to reduce the consumption of data
capacity.
11. Temporarily stores the BTC-compressed image data.12. The stored image data is compressed in the JBIG (Joint bi-level image experts
group) format.
13. Each Image data of R, G, and B in the copy, print, scan, and fax mode is stored. In
PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K is stored.
14. The image data read from the file memory is uncompressed through a method of
JBIG compression. At this time, image rotating or sorting processing is conducted.
15. JBIG image data are expanded in the frame memory.
16. Each Image data of R, G, and B is stored in frame memory.
17. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory.
18. The image data is uncompressed through a method of BTC compression.19. FIFO memory is used to enlarge or reduce images in the main scanning direction.
The image is enlarged by increasing the number of data readings and reduced by
decreasing the number of data readings.
20. Reduction processing is conducted in sub scanning direction. No processing is
done at same size or zoom, but at reduction, the lines are thinned out.
21. When copying in a photo mode or making PC print, the V data is converted to the K
density data. Also, the masking processing, which compensates for the deviation in
the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are per-
formed on the image data.
22. The security pattern is embedded in the image data. Either enabling copying
through a password or unconditionally prohibiting copying can be selected from thecontrol panel for the security pattern to be embedded (when the security kit SC-507
is mounted).
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 262/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 25. IMAGE PROCESSING
225
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
23. Edge of letter and lineal drawing gets area discrimination and FEET processing is
conducted according to the discrimination result.
24. When FEET processing is conducted, interpolation is done so that no influence is
given to continuous gradation portion.
25. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear charac-
teristics, since the image density of the input image data is not directly proportional
to that of the printed image because of the changing developing and photo conduc-
tor characteristics.26. In photo mode during copying and PC print, the image is processed as multi-valued
data (8-bit data). In any mode other than photo, the error diffusion method is
employed to process the image as binary (1-bit) data.
27. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding
gradation reproduction.
28. Adjust the processing speed in the board (main scanning) to conform to the input
processing speed. The laser is emitted according to the laser intensity information.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 263/569
26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
226
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON
26.1.1 Configuration
26.1.2 Operation• When the main power switch is turned ON, power is supplied from the DC power supply
unit to the following components.
A2WUT2C082DA
Main power switch(Power switch) (SW1)
Voltage Power supplied to
12V Fax board, control panel
5V MFP board, HDD, Fax board, Scanner section
3.3V Control panel
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 264/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
227
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
26.1.3 Auto power OFF system
• The main power switch is mounted with a function that automatically turns it OFF.
Using Utility - Administrator Settings - System Settings - Power Save Settings, the time of
day can be set at which to turn OFF the power (default setting: not turning OFF).
For details, see Field Service of the service manual.
[1] Main power switch (Power switch)
(Front view)
[2] Main power switch (Power switch)
(Rear view)
A2WUT2C083DA
[1]
[2]
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 265/569
26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
228
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON
26.2.1 Configuration
26.2.2 Operation
• When the sub power switch is turned ON, MFP board detects it and sends a control sig-
nal to the DC power supply through the printer control board.
• The DC power supply then supplies 3.3 VDC, 5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC, and 24VDC to all
PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the PWBs and power can be supplied to
the IH heater and the heater lamp.
NOTE• To turn OFF and ON the main power switch, first turn OFF the main power switch
and wait for 10 sec. or more before turning it ON again. If a setting value or valuesin the tech. rep. mode are changed, it takes 10 sec. or more to incorporate the set-ting changes properly in the machine.
A0P0T2E614AA
Sub power switch
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 266/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION
229
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
26.3 Power cables
26.3.1 Configuration
• bizhub 652/552/602/502
26.3.2 Operation
• bizhub 652/552/602/502:
The main body uses a single outlet.
A00HT2C304AA
Power supply:100V 15A110V 15A120V 16A127V 16A220-240V 10A
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 267/569
27. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
230
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
27. FAN CONTROL
27.1 Configuration
A2WUT2C001DA
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
IU cooling fan motor
(FM15)
Toner suction fanmotor (FM7)
IH cooling fan motor/1(FM10)
MFP controlboard coolingfan motor(FM17)
Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)
Power supply coolingfan motor (FM9)
Writing cooling fan motor (M14)
Optical cooling fan motor (FM201)
Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)
Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)
Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)
Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)
IH cooling fan motor/2(FM12)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Intake air
Discharge air
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 268/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 27. FAN CONTROL
231
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
27.2 Operation
27.2.1 Function
Motor name Control conditions
Suction fan motor (FM1)
• Paper will be sucked between transfer part and fusing part, so it will have
a stable behavior and go smoothly into the fusing roller.
• The air inside will be exhausted outside the unit.
Fusing cooling fan motor/
1 (FM2)
• Odor accumulated in the fusing part is absorbed by the odor filter to be
removed.
• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at the fusing part.
Cooling fan motor/1 (FM3)• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at the transfer part or the fusing part.
Fusing cooling fan motor/
3 (FM5)
• Toner with paper heated at the fusing part may adhere to another paper
on the paper exit tray when it will exit on the tray with remaining heat. In
order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to
ejected paper and toner to cool it down.
Ozone ventilation fan
motor (FM6)
• A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of
the photo conductor due to ozone accumulated around the photo con-
ductor charge corona. In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes
the ozone inside the photo conductor charge corona to keep the sensitiv-
ity of the photo conductor.
• Ozone accumulated around photo conductor charge corona will be
absorbed by ozone filter and be removed.
Toner suction fan motor
(FM7)
• Toner easily scattered around a developing roller is sucked. Sucked air
will be filtered and toner will be discharged outside.
Power supply cooling fan
motor (FM9)
• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at the power part.IH cooling fan motor/1
(FM10)
• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at the IH power used for fusing part.
IH cooling fan motor/2
(FM12)
• In order to avoid the temperature increase around IH power used for the
fusing part, the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.
Paper cooling fan motor
(FM13)
• In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to
ejected paper to cool it down.
PH cooling fan motor
(FM14)
• In order to avoid the temperature increase around PH, the outside air is
sucked into the unit to cool it.
IU cooling fan motor
(FM15)
• In order to avoid the temperature increase around TC part, IU part, trans-
fer unit, etc., the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.
Rear side cooling fan
motor (FM16)
• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to
avoid temperature increase at rear side of the unit, such as the board
box.
MFP control board cooling
fan motor (FM17)
• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged in order to avoid tem-
perature increase at the MFP board.
Optical cooling fan motor
(FM201)
• Heat accumulated inside the IR part will be discharged in order to avoid
temperature increase at the scanner motor.
Exit cooling fan motor/1, /
2, /3 (FM101, FM102,
FM103)
• In order to avoid toner attachment while the exit plate kit is used, outside
air is applied to the paper to cool it.
• Fan motor for the exit plate kit (0T-503)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 269/569
27. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
232
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
27.2.2 Control conditions
Motor name Control Control conditions (outline)
Suction fan motor (FM1)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed
• During print cycle
• During image stabilization performed during print cycle
• During transfer belt cleaning performed during print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
Power supply cooling
fan motor/1 (FM2)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
Cooling fan motor (FM3)
Stop
• During warm-up cycle (in case that warm-up cycle is within
60 sec.)
• For 60 sec. after the start of warm-up cycle (in case that
warm-up cycle is within 60 sec. or more)
Half speed*1
• Other than stop and full speed
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
Fusing cooling fan
motor/3 (FM5)
Stop• During predrive
• During fusing warm-up
Half speed
*1
• In standby state
• During image stabilization performed during print cycle
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-ment.
• During transfer belt cleaning performed during print cycle
• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the above operations
Ozone ventilation fan
motor (FM6)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Half speed
• Half speed rotation for a predetermined period of time follow-
ing full speed rotation for 30 sec. after stop of the photo con-
ductor
Full speed
• During print cycle
• During image stabilization
• During TCR automatic adjustment
• During auxiliary toner supply• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the completion of above
operations and stop of the photo conductor
Color toner suction fan
motor (FM7)
Stop • When the K developing motor is deenergized
Full speed• While the K developing motor remains energized at such tim-
ing as during print cycle or stabilization
Power supply cooling
fan motor (FM9)
Stop • In power OFF state
Half speed
*1• Any timing other than below
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-ment.
• During image stabilization
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 270/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 27. FAN CONTROL
233
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
IH cooling fan motor/1
(FM10)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Half speed• Half speed rotation for 30 sec. after the end of following con-
ditions
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.• During fusing warm-up
IH cooling fan motor/2
(FM12)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed
• During print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
• During fusing warm-up
Paper cooling fan motor
(FM13)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Half speed• Half speed rotation for 110 sec. after the end of following
conditions
Full speed
• During print cycle• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above opera-
tion
Writing cooling fan
motor (FM14)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Half speed
*1• In standby
Full speed
• During print cycle
• During image stabilization
• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after print cycle or image stabi-
lization
IU cooling fan motor
(FM15)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed• While the K PC motor remains energized at such timing as
during print cycle or stabilization
Rear side cooling fan
motor (FM16)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed
• During print cycle
• During image stabilization performed during print cycle
• During transfer belt cleaning performed during print cycle
• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-
ment.
• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above opera-tion
MFP control board cool-
ing fan motor (FM17)
Stop
• When sub power switch is turned OFF
• In sleep state
• In low power state
Half speed • In standby state
Full speed • Any timing other than above
Optical cooling fan
motor (FM201)Full speed • While the exposure lamp (FL201) is ON
Exit cooling fan motor/1
(FM101)
Stop • Any timing other than below
Full speed • Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following theend of print cycle
Motor name Control Control conditions (outline)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 271/569
27. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
234
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
*1: Half speed control: When switching from stop to half speed control, the fan will rotate atfull speed and then will rotate at half speed.
Exit cooling fan motor2/
3 (FM102,FM103)
Stop• For printing a paper which size is B5 or less. Or other than
following.
Full speed
• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following the
end of print cycle. (For printing a paper which size is larger
that B5.
Motor name Control Control conditions (outline)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 272/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 28. COUNTER CONTROL
235
b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
28. COUNTER CONTROL
28.1 Configuration
28.2 Operation
NOTE• The counting modes can be selected at [billing setting] of service mode.
For details, see [Field service/adjustment/setting/billing setting].
A0P0T2C612AA
Total counter
Electronic counter
Key counter (option)
Printer control board(PRCB)
MFP board (MFPB)
Name Function/system
Total counter
• Displays the cumulative number of copies and prints of all jobs.
• A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Electronic counter
• Number of total in copy/printer/fax/scan mode will be displayed on
the screen as described below.
• Black
• Total counter, large size counter, total (copy + printer), scan counter,
fax TX counter, fax RX counter, No. of originals counter, No. of prints
counter, total duplex counter
• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it
Key counter (option)
• When charging prints by using the key counter, copies cannot be
made with out the key counter. However PC prints and fax TX/RX
service are available without the key counter.
• Displays the cumulative number of copies while the key counter is
being mounted.
• A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal
• Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming start
signal, whichever occurs earlier, is applied to it
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 273/569
28. COUNTER CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
236
bizhub652/552/602/502
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 274/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 275/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 276/569
D F - 6 1 8
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
DF-618
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 5
3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................5
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 6
5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 7
6. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 8
6.1 Paper feed section ................................................................................................ 8
6.1.1 Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism .......................................... 8
6.1.2 Feeding the original....................................................................................... 9
6.1.3 Document set detection ................................................................................ 9
6.1.4 Original size detection................................................................................. 10
6.2 Transport section ................................................................................................ 11
6.2.1 Transfer mechanism.................................................................................... 11
6.2.2 Reading roller pressure/retraction control................................................... 116.3 Turnover/paper exit section................................................................................. 12
6.3.1 Transferring the original............................................................................... 12
6.3.2 Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit .............................................12
6.3.3 Switch back roller pressure/retraction control ............................................. 14
6.4 Paper path .......................................................................................................... 15
6.4.1 1-sided mode .............................................................................................. 15
6.4.2 2-sided mode .............................................................................................. 16
6.4.3 Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided) ............................................................ 17
6.5 Open/close detecting section.............................................................................. 19
6.5.1 DF 20 degree open/close detection ............................................................ 19
6.5.2 DF open/close detection ............................................................................. 19
6.6 Cooling inside the unit ........................................................................................20
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 277/569
D F - 6 1 8
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 278/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
D F - 6 1 8
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
*1: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.
Name Reverse automatic document feeder
Type
Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack
Image reading section Sheet-through system
Turnover section Switchback system
Exit section Straight exit system
Installation Screw cramp to the main body
Document alignment Center
Document loading Face up
Modes Standard mode / Mixed original detection mode / FAX mode
Type of document
Standard mode
1-sided mode
35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)
2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Mixed original detection mode1-sided / 2-sided mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
FAX mode
1-sided mode
35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Detectable document
size*1Standard mode/FAX mode
Metric area: B6S to A3
Inch area: 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 to 11 x 17
Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) or stack of 14 mm and below
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 279/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
D F - 6 1 8
D. Paper feed prohibited originals• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of original Possible trouble
Sheets stapled or clipped togetherPaper feed failure, damaged sheet, defective drive
mechanism due to jammed staples or clips
Sheets glued together Paper feed failure, damaged sheet
Book original Paper feed failure, damaged sheet
Original weighing less than 35 g/m2 (9.25 lb) or
210 g/m2 (55.75 lb) or morePaper feed failure, transport failure
Sheets folded, torn or wrinkledPaper feed failure, damaged sheet,
transport failure
Sheets severely curledSheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in
askew
OHP film (Transparency film) Paper feed failure, transport failure
Label paper Paper feed failure, transport failure
Offset master paper Paper feed failure, transport failureGlossy photographic paper or glossy enamel
paperTransport failure, damaged sheet
Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet, transport failure
Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet
Type of Original Possible Trouble
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm) Dog-eared, exit failure, transport failure
Heat sensitive paper Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Ink jet paper Paper feed failure, transport failure
Sheets with smooth surface (Coated paper) Paper feed failure, transport failure
Intermediate paper Paper feed failure, transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Paper feed failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited
to vertical feedingMulti-page feed due to flashes from holes
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded Transport failure, image deformation
Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Paper feed failure
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 280/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
3
O U T L I N E
D F - 6 1 8
F. Mixed original feed chartFor metric
For inch
Max. original
size297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm
Mixed original size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S B6S
297 mm
A3 OK OK - - - - - - -
A4 OK OK - - - - - - -
257 mmB4 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
B5 OK OK OK OK - - - - -
210 mmA4S OK OK OK OK OK OK - - -
A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK - - -
182 mm B5S NG NG OK OK OK OK OK - -
148 mm A5S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK -
128 mm B6S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK
Max. original size 11 8 1 / 2 5 1 / 2
Mixed original size 11 x 17 8 1 / 2 x 11 8 1 / 2 x 14 8 1 / 2 x 11S 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S
1111 x 17 OK OK - - - -
8 1 / 2 x 11 OK OK - - - -
8 1 / 2
8 1 / 2 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK -
8 1 / 2 x 11S OK OK OK OK OK -
5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 NG NG OK OK OK -
51
/ 2 51
/ 2 x 81
/ 2S NG NG NG NG NG OK
OK Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less)
NG No. mixed original feed
- Can not set original
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 281/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
D F - 6 1 8
G. Machine specifications
H. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V
Max. power
consumption60 W or less
Dimensions
618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H)
24.33 inch (W) x 22.64 inch (D) x 5.12 inch (H)
Weight 16.0 kg (35.27 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 282/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
5
O U T L I N E
D F - 6 1 8
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
3. PAPER PATH
9J07T2C203c0
Transport section Paper feed section Paper exit section
Turnover section Paper exit turnover section
A0HTT2C001DA
Exit tray
Document read position
Feed tray
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 283/569
4. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONFIGURATION
[1] Transportation cover [5] Original read section
[2] Document feed tray [6] Magnet
[3] Turnover cover
[4] Document guide
A0P0T5C052DA
[1] [2]
[4] [3] A01HT2C002AA[5] [6]
A0HTT4C001DA
Pick-up roller
Separation roller Switch back roller
Reading roller 1
Switch back registration roller
Reading roller 2
Exit switch back roller
Exit roller
Feed roller
Registration roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 284/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. DRIVE
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
5. DRIVE
A0HTT5C001DA
Reading motor (M1)
Exit motor (M3)Take-up motor (M2)
Regist motor (M7)
Lift-up motor (M6)
Switch back rollerpressure/retractionmotor (M5)
Reading roller pressure/ retraction motor (M4)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 285/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6. OPERATION
6.1 Paper feed section
6.1.1 Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism
• The document feed tray will move up to feed the original.
• Ascent/descent of the document feed tray will be performed by the lift-up motor.
A. Document feed tray ascent• The document feed tray will stay in the stand-by position when in stand-by status.
• Setting the original and pressing the start key will move the document feed tray up.
• The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move
above the cam, and the document feed tray will move up.
• The document feed tray will stop moving up when the lift up upper sensor is transmitted.
B. Document feed tray descent• When all the originals are fed and the empty sensor is interrupted, the lift-up motor will
reverse.
• The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move
above the cam, and the document feed tray will move down.
• The document feed tray will stop moving down when the lift up lower sensor is inter-
rupted.
9J07T2C202c0
Lift up lever
Lift-up motor (M6)
Lift up lowersensor (PS15)
Empty sensor (PS14)
Lift up uppersensor (PS16)
Descent position
Ascent position
Drive cam
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 286/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
6.1.2 Feeding the original
• The paper feed section consists of the pick-up roller, feed roller as well as the separation
roller, and is directly driven by the take-up motor.
• Pressing the start key will transfer the original to the registration roller by the pick-up
roller and the feed roller.
6.1.3 Document set detection
• To prevent a document set mistake, the document set sensor detects a document loaded
in the document feed tray.
A07HT2C002DB
Take-up motor (M2)
Pick-up roller
Separation roller
Feed roller
A0HTT6C001DA
Document feed tray
Document setsensor (PS20)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 287/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.1.4 Original size detection
A. Detecting the width of the original 1• The width of the original will be detected by the document width detection variable resis-
tor under the document feed tray.
• Reference for setting the original on the document feed tray is its center.
B. Detecting the width of the original 2• Three mixed sensors are mounted to where the paper passes immediately after it is fed.
It is for detecting the width of the original for mixed original/AMS.
C. Detecting the length of the original 1
• The length of the original will be detected by the length sensor 1/2/3.• Length sensors 1 and 3 are mounted in this order with the length sensor 2 being closest
to the feed roller.
D. Detecting the length of the original 2• Length of the mixed original/AMS will be calculated by the time before read sensor is
interrupted.
A0HTT6C002DA
Length sensor 1(PS10)
Length sensor 3(PS12)
Length sensor 2(PS11)
Before readsensor (PS9)
Mixed sensor 1(PS19)
Mixed sensor 2(PS18)
Mixed sensor 3(PS17)
Document width detectionvariable resistor (VR1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 288/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
6.2 Transport section
6.2.1 Transfer mechanism
• The original transferred from the paper feed section will be transferred to the paper exit
section or turnover section by the registration roller, the reading roller 1 and 2, and the
switch back roller.
• The registration roller and the switch back roller are driven by the regist motor.
• Reading roller 1 and 2 are driven by the reading motor.
6.2.2 Reading roller pressure/retraction control• Document speed fluctuates as the trailing edge of the document moves past reading
roller 1. To inhibit these speed fluctuations, the reading roller pressure/retraction motor is
employed to retract reading roller 1.
A07HT2C003DB
Reading motor (M1)
Registrationsensor (PS3)
Reading roller 1
Reading roller 2
Switch back rollerRegist motor (M7)Registration roller
A0HTT6C003DA
Retract readingroller 1
Lever
Reading roller pressure/ retraction motor (M4)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 289/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.3 Turnover/paper exit section
6.3.1 Transferring the original
• The original transferred from the transport section will switch back or exit by the exit
roller, the switch back roller, and the exit switch back roller.
• The exit roller and the exit switch back roller are driven by the exit motor.
• The switch back roller is driven by the regist motor.
6.3.2 Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit
A. Turnover section• Pathway of the original will be switched and the original will turnover by the switch back
lever.
• Switch back lever is switched by ON/OFF of the switch back solenoid.
A0HTT6C004DA
Exit motor (M3)
Regist motor (M7)
Switch back rollerExit switch back roller
Exit roller
When in 1-sided mode:Switch back solenoid will be OFF
9J07T2C013DA9J07T2C012DA
When in 2-sided/ mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode:Switch back solenoid will be ON
Switch back solenoid (SD1)
Exit roller Switch back roller
Switch back lever
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 290/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
B. Paper exit section• The exit lever will switch the pathway of the original to exit.
• The exit lever will be switched by ON/OFF of the exit switch back solenoid.
9J07T2C014DA
When in 1-sided mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be OFFWhen in 2-sided/mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be ON
Exit switch back solenoid (SD2)
Exit lever
Exit switch back roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 291/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.3.3 Switch back roller pressure/retraction control
• To enhance productivity in document scanning, control is performed at the turnover sec-
tion by narrowing the gap between two originals so that they pass each other properly at
the switch back roller. The switch back roller pressure/retraction motor provides the drive
for the pressure/retraction operations of the switch back roller.
• This control is performed during the mixed original AMS mode only.
A0HTT6C005DA
A0P0T5C114DA
Switch backroller pressure/ retraction motor(M5)
Switch backroller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 292/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
6.4 Paper path
6.4.1 1-sided mode
1. Pressing the start key will lift up the feed tray and press the reading roller 1.
2. After the feed tray is lifted up, the feed motor is started and the pick-up roller and
the feed roller will start rotating to start feeding the first sheet of paper.
3. When the paper reaches the registration roller, a loop is formed in the paper. Then,the regist motor is started, so that the registration roller transfers the paper.
4. The take-up motor is deenergized when a predetermined period of time elapses
after the registration motor has been activated. The reading motor and the exit
motor will start running.
5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor
turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.
6. Reading roller 1 will be retracted right before the back edge of the original passes
through the reading roller 1. The retracted reading roller 1 will be pressed again to
prepare for the next original.
7. The original will be exit by the reading roller 2 and the exit roller.8. All motors will turn OFF after the back edge of the original turns OFF the exit sen-
sor and the specified period of time is passed.
A0HTT6C007DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 293/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.4.2 2-sided mode
1. The first side of the original will be read.
2. The original will be transferred to the turnover section. (Switch back solenoid will be
ON)
3. In order to read the second side of the original which is transferred to the turnover
section, the switch back roller will reverse by the switch pack operation of the regist
motor, and transfer the original to the switch back registration roller.
4. The switch back registration sensor will turn ON and the switch back registration
roller will rotate by the exit motor to transfer the original to the original read section.
5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor
turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.
6. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after it is read.
(switch back solenoid will be ON)
Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motor’s reverse operation.
7. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate for-
ward by the exit motor’s forward operation. The original will be turned over and be
discharged.
A0HTT6C008DA
A0HTT6C009DA
A0HTT6C010DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 294/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
17
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
6.4.3 Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided)
• Paper path control will be the same as the 2-sided mode.
1. The original will be fed to detect the paper length. (It will not read the original)
The length of the original will be judged by the before read sensor ON time, and the
width of the original will be judged by the mixed sensor 1, 2, and 3.
2. The original will be fed without the 2nd side being read.
3. After reading the first side, the original will be transferred again to the switch backpart to read the second side.
A0HTT6C011DA
A0HTT6C012DA
A0HTT6C013DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 295/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
4. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after second side
is read. (Switch back solenoid will be ON)
Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motor’s reverse operation.
5. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate for-
ward by the exit motor’s forward operation. The original will be turned over and be
discharged.
A0HTT6C014DA
A0HTT6C015DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 296/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION
19
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
D F - 6 1 8
6.5 Open/close detecting section
6.5.1 DF 20 degree open/close detection
• The lever actuator is provided to detect the original size when using the auto document
feeder as the original cover.
• When lowering the auto document feeder to 20 degree angle or lower, the angle detec-
tion lever for the original cover on the copier will be pressed to turn ON the 20 degree
sensor.
6.5.2 DF open/close detection
• The magnet is installed to detect the open/close of the auto document feeder on the
copier side.
• The original cover/DF open sensor on the copier will turn ON by the magnet when lower-
ing DF.
A0HTT2C501AAOriginal cover/DF open sensor (RS201)
MagnetLever
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 297/569
6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
D F - 6 1 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.6 Cooling inside the unit
• The air will be blown inside the unit by the cooling fan in order to avoid the temperature
increase of the driving motor and the board.
A01HT2C004AA
Cooling fanmotor (FM1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 298/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 299/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 300/569
L U - 3 0 1
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
LU-301
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 2
3. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
6. OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5
6.1 Paper Feed and Transport Control ....................................................................... 5
6.2 Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6
6.3 Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7
6.4 Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7
6.5 Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8
6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8
6.5.2 Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10
6.6 Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 10
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 301/569
L U - 3 0 1
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 302/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1
O U T L I N E
L U - 3 0 1
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Paper type
*1: Images are out of guarantee.
*2: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name 3,000 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment Center
Type Size Weight Capacity
Plain paper
A4, 8 1 / 2 x 11
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
16 lb to 24 lb3,000 sheets
Thick paper 191 g/m2 to 120 g/m2
24.25 lb to 32 lb2,500 sheets *2
Thick paper 1+121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2
32.25 lb to 41.75 lb1,750 sheets *2
Thick paper 2158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2
42 lb to 55.5 lb1,550 sheets *2
Thick paper 3210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2
55.75 lb to 68 lb1,300 sheets *1 *2
Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption23 W or less
Dimensions367 mm (W) x 528 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)
14.5 inch (W) x 20.75 inch (D) x 16 inch (H)
Weight 18.0 kg (39.75 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 303/569
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
L U - 3 0 1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
3. PAPER FEED PATH
A03NT1C002AA
Paper feed sectionPaper storage sectionPaper transport section
Dehumidification heater
A03NT1C001AA
Transportation to main body
LU-301Main body
Paper feed from the tray
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 304/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 3 0 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONFIGURATION
A03NT2C213AA
A03NT2C204AA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
Paper empty sensor (PS4)
Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)
Tray LED (LED)
Dehumidification heater(DH)
LU door switch (MS1)
LU drive board (LUDB)
Tray set sensor (PS1)
Lift-up motor (M1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 305/569
5. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
L U - 3 0 1
O P E R A T I O N
5. DRIVE
A03NT2C214AA
Transport motor (M3)
Paper feed motor (M2)
Transport roller
Feed roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 306/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 3 0 1
6. OPERATIONS
6.1 Paper Feed and Transport Control
• The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.
• The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.
• In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is
below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predeter-mined interval.
• The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.
• Layout of sensors and rollers
System speed (mm/s) Paper transport speed (mm/s)
310 to 240 420
264 to 216 350
155 to 108 216
A03NT2C001AA
Paper feed motor (M2)
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
Transport motor (M3)
Start key ON
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)
A03NT2C002AA
Tray2 vertical transportroller
Tray2 vertical transport sensor(PS12)
Feed roller
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
LU-301Main body
Transfer roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 307/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
L U - 3 0 1
O P E R A T I O N
6.2 Paper level detection
• The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near
empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.
• A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.
Reference data:
plain paperPaper full Paper near full Paper available Near empty
Paper level 3000 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets 50 to 1 sheets
Near empty sensor /1 blocking blocking unblocking unblocking
Near empty sensor /2 unblocking blocking blocking unblocking
A03NT2C203AA
Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
Paper level detection plate
Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)
NotchNotch
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 308/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 3 0 1
6.3 Paper empty detection
• The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.
6.4 Paper level indicator
• The amount of paper still available for use, or the paper level, is indicated by the LED
provided on the right-hand side of the unit as viewed from the front.
• Following describe different paper level conditions.
*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode − System 1 −
Machine State LED Setting − Paper Remainder.
A03NT2C205AA
A03NT2C205AA
Paper empty sensor (PS4)
Paper empty condition
Paper still availableUpper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper condition Empty Near emptyOther than empty and near empty conditions,
during lift-up
LED display ON Blinking *1 OFF
A03NT2C204AA
LED
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 309/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
L U - 3 0 1
O P E R A T I O N
6.5 Tray lift-up control
6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism
• The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.
• Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.
• Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mecha-
nism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.
• There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as
the height of the tray when the tray is empty.
A03NT2C215AA
Coupling
Lift-up motor (M1)
Drive assist spring
LU door
Wire
Paper tray
Lift-up axis
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 310/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 3 0 1
A. Closing the LU door• The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If
the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray
is started.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the
lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.
B. During a print cycle• As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller grad-
ually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then
energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the
lifting of the tray.
• The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper take-
up pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardless
of the level of the paper stack left.
A03NT2C216AA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper tray
A03NT2C207AA
LU door switch (MS1)
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Lift-up motor (M1)
LU door closed Lifting completed
A03NT2C208AA03NT2C209AA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)Pick-up Roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 311/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
L U - 3 0 1
O P E R A T I O N
6.5.2 Paper size detection
• The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.
• The paper size is set by Service Mode → System 2 → LCT Paper Size Setting.
6.6 Dehumidification heater control• The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.
• The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off
of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.
A03NT2E500DA
A03NT2C212AA
Dehumidificationheater (DH)
Right sidesurface
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 312/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 313/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 314/569
L U - 2 0 4
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
LU-204
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 2
3. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
6. OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5
6.1 Paper feed and transport control .......................................................................... 5
6.2 Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6
6.3 Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7
6.4 Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7
6.5 Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8
6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8
6.5.2 Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10
6.6 Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 11
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 315/569
L U - 2 0 4
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 316/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1
O U T L I N E
L U - 2 0 4
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Paper type
*1: Images are out of guarantee.
*2: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.
*3: Fixed size for European market
*4: Fixed size for North American market
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name 2,500 sheets Large Capacity Unit
Type External option attached to the right side of the main body
Document alignment Center
Type Size Weight Capacity
Plain paper
A3, B4, A4, A4S,
A3 Wide *3
11 x 17 *4
8 1 / 2 x 14 *4
8 1 / 2 x 11S *4
8 1 / 2 x 11 *4
12 x 18 *4
60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
16 lb to 24 lb2,500 sheets
Thick paper 191 g/m2 to 120 g/m2
24.25 lb to 32 lb2,000 sheets *2
Thick paper 1+ 121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2
32.25 lb to 41.75 lb1,450 sheets *2
Thick paper 2158 g/m2 to 209 g/m2
42 lb to 55.5 lb1,250 sheets *2
Thick paper 3210 g/m2 to 256 g/m2
55.75 lb to 68 lb1,000 sheets *1 *2
Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption23 W or less
Dimensions629 mm (W) x 556 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)
24.76 inch (W) x 21.89 inch (D) x 15.94 inch (H)
Weight 25.0 kg (55.12 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 317/569
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
L U - 2 0 4
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
3. PAPER FEED PATH
A0TJT1C001DA
Paper feed section Paper storage sectionPaper transport section
Dehumidification heater
A0TJT1C002DA
Transportation to main body
LU-204Main body
Paper feed from the tray
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 318/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 2 0 4
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONFIGURATION
A0TJT2C002DA
A0TJT2C001DA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper feed
sensor (PS3)
Paper empty sensor (PS4)
Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)
Tray LED (LED)
Dehumidification heater (DH)
LU door switch (MS1)
LU drive board (LUDB)
Tray set sensor (PS1)
Lift-up motor (M1)
Tray set sensor/2 (PS7)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 319/569
5. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
L U - 2 0 4
O P E R A T I O N
5. DRIVE
A0TJT2C003DA
Transport motor (M3)
Paper feed motor (M2)
Transport roller
Feed roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 320/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 2 0 4
6. OPERATIONS
6.1 Paper feed and transport control
• The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.
• The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.
• In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is
below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predeter-mined interval.
• The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.
• Layout of sensors and rollers
System speed (mm/s) Paper transport speed (mm/s)
310 to 240 420
264 to 216 350
155 to 108 216
A03NT2C001AA
Paper feed motor (M2)
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
Transport motor (M3)
Start key ON
Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12)
Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7)
A0TJT2C004DA
Tray2 vertical transportroller
Tray2 vertical transport sensor(PS12)
Feed roller
Paper feed sensor (PS3)
LU-204Main body
Transport roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 321/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
L U - 2 0 4
O P E R A T I O N
6.2 Paper level detection
• The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near
empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.
• A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.
Reference data:
plain paperPaper full Paper near full Paper available Near empty
Paper level 2500 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets 50 to 1 sheets
Near empty sensor /1 blocking blocking unblocking unblocking
Near empty sensor /2 unblocking blocking blocking unblocking
A0TJT2C005DA
Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)
Paper level detection plate
Near empty sensor /2 (PS6)
Notch
Notch
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 322/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 2 0 4
6.3 Paper empty detection
• The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.
6.4 Paper level indicator
• The level of the paper still available for use is indicated by the LED provided on the right-
hand side of the unit as viewed from the front, and displayed on the control panel.
• Following describe different paper level conditions.
*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode − System 1 −
Machine State LED Setting − Paper Remainder.
A0TJT2C006DA
Paper empty sensor (PS4)
Paper empty condition
Paper still available
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper condition Empty Near emptyOther than empty and near empty conditions,
during lift-up
LED display ON Blinking *1 OFF
A0TJT2E017DA
LED Displayed on the Control panel
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 323/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
L U - 2 0 4
O P E R A T I O N
6.5 Tray lift-up control
6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism
• The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.
• Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.
• Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mecha-
nism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.
• There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as
the height of the tray when the tray is empty.
A0TJT2C008DA
Coupling
Lift-up motor (M1)Drive assist spring
LU door
Wire
Paper tray
Lift-up axis
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 324/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 2 0 4
A. Closing the LU door• The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If
the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray
is started.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the
lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.
A0TJT2C013DA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Paper tray
A03NT2C207AA
LU door switch (MS1)
Upper limit sensor (PS2)
Lift-up motor (M1)
LU door closed Lifting completed
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 325/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
L U - 2 0 4
O P E R A T I O N
B. During a print cycle• As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller grad-
ually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then
energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.
• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the
lifting of the tray.
• The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper take-
up pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardlessof the level of the paper stack left.
6.5.2 Paper size detection
• The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.
• The paper size is set by Service Mode → System 2 → LCT Paper Size Setting.
A0TJT2C010DA
Upper limit sensor (PS2)Pick-up Roller
A0TJT2E015DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 326/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
L U - 2 0 4
6.6 Dehumidification heater control
• The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.
• The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off
of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.
A0TJT2C012DA
Dehumidificationheater (DH)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 327/569
6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
L U - 2 0 4
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 328/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 329/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 330/569
Z U - 6 0 6
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
ZU-606
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 6
3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................7
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................... 9
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9
4.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 10
4.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 12
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching......................................................................... 12
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switching ............................................................... 14
4.3.3 Registration control .....................................................................................17
5. PUNCH SECTION ................................................................................................ 18
5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 18
5.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
5.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 195.3.1 Punch control .............................................................................................. 19
5.3.2 Punch position movement control............................................................... 21
5.3.3 Punch hole switching control....................................................................... 24
6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION....................................................... 25
6.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 25
6.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 26
6.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 27
6.3.1 Punch scraps conveyance control............................................................... 276.3.2 Punch scraps control .................................................................................. 28
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION.......................................................................................... 29
7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29
7.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 30
7.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 31
7.3.1 1st folding control ........................................................................................31
7.3.2 2nd folding control....................................................................................... 33
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 331/569
Z U - 6 0 6
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 332/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
Type Z-folding multi punching device
Punch Punching method Reciprocal punching method (punching each paper)
No. of holes Metric area : 2 holes/4 holes (switched automatically)
Inch area : 2 holes/3 holes (switched automatically)
Hole diameter Metric area : 6.5 ± 0.5 mm
Inch area : 8.0 ± 0.5 mm
Hole position
Folding method Buckle folding method with the roller pair
A109T1C001DA
Hole pitchMetric area : 80 ± 0.5 mmInch area : 70 ± 0.5 mm
Metric area : 11.0 ± 5 mmInch area : 9.5 ± 5 mm
Center of thepaper
Inch area : 9.5 ± 5 mm
Metric area : 11.0 ± 5 mm
Center of thepaper
Center of thepaper
Hole pitch 108 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 80 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 80 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 80 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 108 ± 0.5 mm
Center of thepaper
Hole pitch 21 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 70 ± 0.5 mm
Hole pitch 21 ± 0.5 mm
Metric area : 10.5 ± 5 mm
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 333/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
Z-folding Folding length
Folding precision
Folding Folding length
Folding precision
A07TT1C010AA
a
L
Paper size L (mm) a (mm)
A3 209 or less
4 ± 2B4 181 or less
11 x 17 215 or less
8K *1 194 or less
A07TT1C011AA
1st folding 2nd folding
2 mm or less 2 mm or less
A07TT1C003AA
L
Paper size L (mm)
8-1 / 2 x 14 263 or less
A07TT1C004AA
2 mm or less
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 334/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
3
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
*1: Only for the Taiwan market
Maximum tray capacity (80 g/m2) The maximum number of sheets for the FS main tray at
the Z-folding operation
• Z-folding continuous: Max. 30 sheets
• Z-folding/stapling: See the table below
No. of sheets per stapleNo. of set on
the main trayNo. of fold sheetsNo. of unfold
sheets
1 sheet1 to 40 sheets 20 set
41 to 90 sheets 10 set
2 sheets 1 to 80 sheets 10 set
3 sheets 1 to 70 sheets 4 set
4 sheets 1 to 60 sheets 3 set
5 sheets 1 to 50 sheets 2 set
6 sheets or greater Not guaranteed
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 335/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
C. Type of paper
*1: Only for the Taiwan market
No punch mode Same as the main body.
Punch mode Paper size
• Combination with the folding/saddle stitching mode is not available.
Metric area 2holes:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1,8 x 13, 8-1 / 2 x 13, 8-1 / 4 x 13, 8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 44holes:
A3, B4, A4, 8K *1, 16K *1
Inch area 2holes:
11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11, 8-1 / 2 x 11S,
5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2S, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2S
3holes:
11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 11
Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the
plain paper
• Special paper is not guaranteed. The punching of labelpaper, tab paper, OHP paper, blueprint master and bind-
ing-holed paper are not allowed.
Z-folding mode Paper size A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8K
• For B4 paper (including the mix of the paper), the com-
bination with the stapling mode is not available.
Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the
plain paper
• Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,
transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in Z-folding mode.
Folding mode Paper size 8-1 / 2 x 14
Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper
• Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,
transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness
paper are not supported in folding mode.
Paper curling
a : Excluding the OHP paper : Amount of curl: 15 mm or less
OHP paper : Amount of curl: 10 mm or less
A07TT1C006AA
5 sheets of paper immediately after the printinga
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 336/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
5
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
D. Maintenance
E. Machine specifications
F. Operating environment
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Maintenance Same as the main body.
Machine service life Same as the main body.
Power requirements 100 to 240 VAC (automatic switching)
DC5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption
120 W or less
Dimensions 169 mm (W) x 660 mm (D) x 1027.5 mm (H)
6.65 inch (W) x 25.98 inch (D) x 40.45 inch (H)
Weight 45 kg (99.21 lb)
Temperature 10 to 30 °C
Humidity 15 to 85 % RH (with no condensation)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 337/569
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
2. SECTION CONFIGURATION
A07TT1C009AA
Punch section
Punch scraps conveyance section
Z-folding section Conveyance section
Main bodyZU-606Finisher
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 338/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. PAPER PATH
7
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
3. PAPER PATH
A. Straight mode/punch mode (for the small size paper : A5, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2)
B. Punch mode (excluding the small size paper)
A07TT1C005AA
A07TT1C007AA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 339/569
3. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
O U T L I N E
Z U - 6 0 6
C. Z-folding mode/punch + Z-folding mode
A07TT1C013AA
From the main body to the 1st folding
From the 2nd folding to the paper exit
From the 1st folding to the 2nd folding
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 340/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Configuration
A07TT2C001AA
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
Exit sensor (PS609)
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602) Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 341/569
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
4.2 Drive
A. Conveyance drive
A07TT2C002AA
Main motor (M606)
2nd folding roller
Gate/Up
Registration roller
Conveyance roller
1st folding roller
Gate/Lw
Exit roller
Registration motor (M601)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 342/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
B. Gate drive
A07TT2C003AA
Gate/Up
Gate/Lw
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 343/569
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Conveyance path switching
• The gates/Lw and /Up switch the conveyance path.
• The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up drive the gate/Lw and the gate/Up
respectively.
A. Gate/Lw• The gate/Lw switches the paper path between the straight conveyance path and the
upper conveyance path.
• The gate/Lw is set to the straight conveyance path when the gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF.
• The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path when gate solenoid/Lw turns ON.
A07TT2C004AA
<Gate solenoid/Lw : OFF> <Gate solenoid/Lw : ON>
Gate/Lw
Straight conveyance path Upper conveyance path
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 344/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
B. Gate/Up• The gate/Up switches the paper path of the paper that was conveyed to the upper con-
veyance path by the gate/Lw.
• The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the exit side when the gate solenoid/Up turns
OFF.
• The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the 1st folding stopper when gate solenoid/Up
turns ON.
C. Operation timing(1) Z-folding mode
1. In the Z-folding mode for the all paper size, the gate solenoid/Lw and the gate sole-
noid/Up turn ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the
paper.
2. The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path and the gate/Up is set to the con-
veyance path to the 1st folding stopper.
3. The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up turn OFF a specified period of time
after the last paper turns OFF the exit sensor.
A07TT2C006AA
<Gate solenoid/Up : OFF> <Gate solenoid/Up : ON>
Gate/Up
Conveyance path to the exit side Conveyance path to the 1st folding stopper
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602) 1st folding stopper
A07TT2E035AA
Leading edge of the paper detectedby the paper size detect board
Gate solenoid/Lw and gatesolenoid/Up turned OFF
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Exit sensor (PS609)
Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)
Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 345/569
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
(2) Punch mode for the small size paper (A5, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2)• Gate solenoids/Lw and gate solenoids/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.
• The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.
(3) Punch mode for the large size paper (other than the small size paper)• The gate solenoid/Lw turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper, and then the gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path. The gate
solenoid/Up remains OFF and the gate/Up remains being set to the paper path to the exitside.
• The gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF a specified period of time after the last paper turns OFF
the exit sensor.
(4) Straight exit mode• Gate solenoid/Lw and gate solenoid/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.
• The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.
4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switching
• The main motor drives the conveyance drive roller, the 1st folding roller, and the 2nd fold-
ing roller, which perform the folding operation, as well as the conveyance roller and theexit roller.
• The paper size detect board, the conveyance sensor, and the exit sensor detect the
paper.
A07TT2C007AA
1st folding roller2nd folding roller
Conveyance roller
Exit roller
Registration roller
Exit sensor (PS609)
Paper size detect board(PSDTB)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Conveyance drive roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 346/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
A. Operation timing(1) Z-folding
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor
turns ON and rotates in high speed.
2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st and 2nd folding opera-
tions a specified period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper.
3. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1stpaper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main
body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns
ON after the 2nd folding operation.
4. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last
paper.
A109T2C001DA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Exit sensor (PS609)
Main motor (M606)High speed
Low speed
Paper pass signal fromthe horizontal transfer
Main motor driven in low speed
1st and 2nd folding operations Main motor driven in high speed
Paper exit operation
1st paper 2nd paper 3rd (last) paper
Main motor turned OFF when the trailingedge of the last paper is detected
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 347/569
4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
(2) Punch + Z-folding1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor
turns ON and rotates in high speed.
2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st folding operation a speci-
fied period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the
paper.
3. The main motor turns OFF for the punching operation a specified period of time
after paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.4. After the punching operation, the main motor turns ON and perform the 2nd folding
operation.
5. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1st
paper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main
body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns
ON after the 2nd folding operation.
6. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last
paper.
A109T2C002DA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Exit sensor (PS609)
Main motor (M606)High speed
Low speed
Paper pass signal fromthe horizontal transfer 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd (last) paper
Main motor driven in low speed
Main motor stopped for the punching operation
2nd folding operation
Main motor driven in high speed
Paper exit operation
Main motor turned OFF when the trailingedge of the last paper is detected
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 348/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION
17
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
4.3.3 Registration control
• The registration control corrects paper skew in the Z-folding mode and the punch mode.
• The paper exited from the main body is pressed against the stopped registration roller
and forms a loop to correct skew of the paper, and then the paper is conveyed with its
leading edge nipped.
• The registration motor drives the registration roller.
A. Operation timing(1) Punch + Z-folding
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the registration
motor turns ON.
2. The registration motor stops a specified period of time after the paper size detect
board detects the leading edge of the paper conveyed from the main body.3. The paper is pressed against the registration roller and forms a loop to correct
paper skew.
4. The registration motor turns ON and the conveyance is restarted a specified period
of time after the paper contacts with the registration roller.
5. The registration motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the paper is
exited.
• No registration control is conducted in the straight mode.
A07TT2C009AA
Leading edge of the paper
Registration roller
Registration motor (M601)
Loop
A109T2C003DA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Registration motor(M601)
High speed
Low speed
Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer
Registration motor stopped
A loop formed
Conveyance restarted
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 349/569
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
5. PUNCH SECTION
5.1 Configuration
5.2 Drive
A07TT2C014AA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Punch home sensor (PS606)
Punch switchover switch (MS601)
A07TT2C013AA
Punch clutch (CL601)
Punch switchover motor (M608)
Cam cover
Eccentric camPunch motor (M604)Cam holder
Punch switchover cam
<Top side view> <Rear side view>
<Right side view>
Eccentric cam (Metric type: 4 piece) (Inch type : 5 piece)
Cam cover
Front direction
Punch switchover cam
Punch switchover motor (M608)
Punch edges Rack
Belt
Punch shift motor (M605)
Punch clutch (CL601)Punch motor (M604)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 350/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SECTION
19
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
5.3 Operation
• The punch operation is conducted for every paper.
• The controls related to the punch operation is the punch control, the punch position
movement control, and the punch hole switching control.
5.3.1 Punch control
• The punch operation is conducted by transmitting the rotation of the punch motor to theeccentric cam by the punch clutch and reciprocating the punch edges connected to the
cam holder once.
• The punch motor drives the eccentric cam and performs the punch operation when
punch clutch turns ON.
• The punch motor rotates clockwise from the view of the rear.
• The punch motor keeps rotating during the punch operation.
• The punch home sensor detects the home position of the punch edges.
A07TT2C015AA
Eccentric camPunch clutch (CL601)
Cam holder
Front direction
<Home position> <Punching position>
Upper positionLower position
Eccentric cam
Punch edges
Paper
Punch motor (M604)
Punch home sensor (PS606)
Cam holder
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 351/569
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
A. Operation timing• The registration motor and the main motor turn OFF to stop the conveyance during the
punch operation.
1. The punch motor turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading
edge of the paper.
2. The punch clutch turns ON and performs the punch operation a specified period of
time after the paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.3. The punch clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.
4. The punch motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the punch clutch turns
OFF.
5. After the punch operation, the registration motor and the main motor turn ON to exit
the paper.
A109T2C004DA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Punch motor (M604)
Punch clutch (CL601)
Leading edge of the paper detected Punch clutch turned ON Punch clutch turned OFF
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 352/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SECTION
21
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
5.3.2 Punch position movement control
• The punch shift motor moves the punch unit to move the punch hole position in the main
scan direction.
• The registration motor controls the punch position in the sub scan direction by its stop
position.
• 5 sensors of the paper size detect board detects the punch hole position.
• The front side sensor among 5 sensors detects the leading/trailing/side edge of the
paper and the other 4 sensors detect the side edge of the paper. The different sensor is
used depending on the paper size.
• The punch shift home sensor detects the home position.
A07TT2C017AA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Leading/trailing/side edge sensor
Punch unit
Punch shift motor (M605)
Side edge sensors
Front direction Punch shift home sensor (PS605)
Belt
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 353/569
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
22
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
A. Standby position movement of the punch unit• In the punch mode, the punch unit is set to the standby position in accordance with the
paper size before the paper is conveyed.
• The punch shift motor moves the punch unit so that the sensor corresponding to the
paper size among 5 sensors of the paper size detect board (in case of A4 paper, the sen-
sor is used) is positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper.
• This operation is not conducted in the no punch mode.
A07TT2C018AA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Standby position
Punch unit
Punch shift motor (M605)
Side edge of the paper
Paper conveyance direction
Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper
Paper
Punch blade
5 mm
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 354/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SECTION
23
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
B. Punch position correction• The punch unit positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper conducts the
punch position correction operation by moving the punch unit back and forth while con-
veying the paper to correct the misalignment between the conveyed paper and the punch
position.
1. Move the punch unit backward until the certain side edge sensor (in case of A4
paper) detects the side edge of the paper.2. Then, move the punch unit forward until the side edge sensor detects the side edge
of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).
3. Move the punch unit forward further so that the center of the punch edges is posi-
tioned to the center of the paper.
A07TT2C019AA
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Standby position
Punch unit
Center of the paper
Paper conveyance direction
Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper
Paper
Punch edges Center of the punch
Moves backward
Moves forward
Side edge of the paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 355/569
5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
24
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
5.3.3 Punch hole switching control
1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the punch switcho-
ver motor switches the number of holes in the punch mode.
2. The punch switchover motor rotates the punch switchover cam clockwise and
moves the eccentric cams and back and forth via the cam cover.
3. When switching between the 2 holes punching and the 4 holes punching in Metric
Type, 2 eccentric cams in the middle remain being held in the cam holders because
they are shared in both cases.
4. When the cam cover moves forward, the eccentric cams at the outside for the 4
holes punching are held in the cam holder so that the total of 4 eccentric cams are
driven.
5. When the cam cover move backward, 2 outside eccentric cams are disengaged.
6. For the switchover between the 2 holes punching and the 3 holes punching in Inch
Type, the 2 holes eccentric cams and the 3 holes eccentric cams work exclusively.
7. When the cam cover moves forward, the 3 holes eccentric cams are held in the
cam holder and the 2 holes eccentric cams are disengaged.
8. This operation is not conducted if the number of holes is same with the previous
printing.
A07TT2E034AA
Punch switchover motor (M608)
<Upper side view>
Cam cover
Front side direction Punch switchover switch (MS601)
Cam holder
Punch switchover cam
Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)
Eccentric cam (4 holes)<Right side view>
Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)Eccentric cam (4 holes)
Punch switchover motor (M608)
Punch switchover switch (MS601)
Front side direction
Moves backward
Moves forward
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 356/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION
25
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION
6.1 Configuration
A07TT2C001DA
Punch scraps full sensor(PS608)
Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)
Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 357/569
6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
26
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
6.2 Drive
A07TT2C021AA
Punch scraps conveyance screw gear
Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 358/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION
27
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Punch scraps conveyance control
• The punch scraps are conveyed by the punch scraps conveyance screw driven by the
punch scraps conveyance motor.
• They are conveyed to the punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.
• The punch scraps conveyance motor turns ON to rotate the punch scraps conveyance
screw a specified period of time after the paper edge sensor detects the trailing edge ofthe paper in the punch mode.
• The punch scraps are sent to the forward by the rotation of the screw and collected in the
punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.
A07TT2C022AA
Punch scraps collective duct
Punch scraps box
Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)Punch scraps conveyance screw
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 359/569
6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
28
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
6.3.2 Punch scraps control
• The punch scraps box set sensor and the punch scraps full sensor monitor the punch
scraps box.
A. Punch scraps full detection• The punch scraps full sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is full or not.
• The punch scraps full sensor turns ON and transmits the punch scraps full signal to themain body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps, and then the main
body displays the message on its operation panel.
B. Punch scraps box detection• The punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is housed or
not.
• The punch scraps box set sensor turns ON and transmits the “no punch scraps box” sig-
nal to the main body when the punch scraps box is not set, and then the main body dis-
plays the message on its operation panel.
A07TT2C023AA
Punch scraps box
Punch scraps full sensor (PS608)
Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 360/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. Z-FOLDING SECTION
29
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION
7.1 Configuration
A07TT2C024AA
2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
Exit sensor (PS609)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 361/569
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
30
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
7.2 Drive
A07TT2C026AA
A07TT2C025AA
2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
Front side direction
1st folding stopper motor (M602)
<1st folding stopper drive>
<2nd folding stopper drive>
1st folding stopper
2nd folding stopper
2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
Front side direction
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 362/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. Z-FOLDING SECTION
31
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 1st folding control
1. The registration roller, the conveyance roller, and the 1st folding roller convey the
paper to the 1st folding stopper section via the gate/Up.
2. A loop is formed between the 1st folding roller and the conveyance drive roller
when the leading edge of the paper is pressed against the 1st folding stopper.
3. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 1st folding is con-ducted.
4. The paper is then conveyed to the 2nd folding stopper section.
5. The position of the 1st folding depends on the position of the 1st folding stopper.
6. The 1st folding stopper motor sets the position in accordance with the number of
steps from the 1st folding stopper home sensor.
7. In the Z-folding mode with the punch mode, the registration motor and the main
motor stops to conduct the punch operation after the 1st folding operation, and then
the registration motor and the main motor turns ON to conduct the 2nd folding
operation.
A07TT2C027AA
1st folding stopper
1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)
Registration roller
2nd foldingdirection
1st folding
Front side
Conveyance drive roller
Conveyance roller
Gate/Up
Loop
1st folding roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 363/569
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
32
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
A. Operation timing1. The 1st folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 1st folding stopper to the appro-
priate position in accordance with the paper size a specified period of time after
transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer.
2. Transmitting the termination signal from the main body, the 1st folding stopper
motor replaces the 1st folding stopper to the home position.
A109T2C005DA
1st folding stopper home sensor(PS603)
1st folding stopper motor (M602)
Exit sensor (PS609)
Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer1st folding stopper moving to the paper size
1st folding stopper returning to the home position
Termination signal
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 364/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. Z-FOLDING SECTION
33
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Z U - 6 0 6
7.3.2 2nd folding control
1. The paper conveyed from the 1st folding section to the 2nd folding section is
stopped by the 2nd folding stopper and forms a loop between conveyance drive
roller and the 2nd folding roller.
2. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 2nd folding is con-
ducted.
3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to move the 2nd folding stopper to the
evacuation position for the paper conveyance when the leading edge of the paper
(2nd folding) conveyed to the paper exit direction passes the conveyance sensor.
4. The 2nd folding is not conducted for 8.5 x 14 paper.
A07TT2C029AA
2nd folding stopper*Folding position
2nd folding stopper home sensor(PS604)
Paper exit direction
2nd folding
Front side
Conveyance drive roller
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Loop
1st folding roller
Exit sensor (PS609)
Paper exit direction
2nd folding roller
2nd folding stopper*Home position
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 365/569
7. Z-FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
34
Z U - 6 0 6
O P E R A T I O N
A. Operation timing1. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 2nd folding stopper to the
appropriate position in accordance with the paper size when the paper size detect
board detects the leading edge of the paper.
2. The 2nd folding stopper motor rotates in the reverse direction to move the 2nd fold-
ing stopper to the home position when the conveyance sensor detects the leading
edge of the paper after the 2nd folding. It opens the paper exit path.
3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to replace the stopper to the original posi-tion for the subsequent Z-folding when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of
the paper.
A109T2C006DA
2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Exit sensor (PS609)
2nd folding stopper motor (M603)
Conveyance sensor (PS601)
Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer
Moving to the 2nd folding position
Moving to the home position
Moving to the 2nd folding positionfor the subsequent paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 366/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 367/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 368/569
F S - 5 2 6
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
FS-526
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Main tray ............................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Sub tray ................................................................................................................ 5
2.3 Stapling................................................................................................................. 6
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION ................................................................. 8
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
4.2 Horizontal transport mechanism........................................................................... 9
4.2.1 Paper transport ............................................................................................. 9
4.2.2 Fan motor.................................................................................................... 10
5. TRANSPORT SECTION.......................................................................................11
5.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 125.2.1 Route change gate......................................................................................12
5.2.2 Bypass gate ................................................................................................ 13
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 15
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 15
6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 16
6.2.1 Tray lift.........................................................................................................16
6.2.2 Exit roller motor........................................................................................... 17
6.2.3 Main tray transport ...................................................................................... 186.2.4 Sub tray exit ................................................................................................ 19
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................20
7.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 20
7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 21
7.2.1 Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 21
7.2.2 Shift control ................................................................................................. 22
7.2.3 Alignment section transport mechanism..................................................... 24
8. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 25
8.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 25
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 369/569
F S - 5 2 6
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 26
8.2.1 Stapler movement....................................................................................... 26
8.2.2 Stapler control............................................................................................. 27
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 370/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Stapling
*1: The stapling capacity for colored paper and enamel paper is 35 sheets (recommended
paper).
*2: And the stapling thickness is 10 mm or less and the stack thickness including curl is 25
mm or less.
Name Flat-stapling finisher: 100 sheets staple
Type Staple finisher attached to the side of the main body
InstallationIncluding horizontal transport unit (Built-in finisher that is mounted from the left of
the main body)
Document
alignmentCenter
Consumables Staples
Modes Non-sort, sor t, offset, group offset, sort staple
Max. flat-stapling
capacity
60 to 80 g/m2: 100 sheets or 94 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *2
81 to 90 g/m2: 30 sheets or 28 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *1
91 g/m2 or more: 2 sheets of thick paper or more not guaranteed
Max. stapling
capacity for differ-
ent paper sizes
100 sheets B5 to A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S (Paper length: 150 to 300 mm)
70 sheets B5 recycled paper 1-sided mode
65 sheets B4S/8 1 / 2 x 14S (Paper length: 389 mm or less)
50 sheetsPaper sizes other than the above (Paper length: 150 mm or less,
390 mm or more) *1, *2
Stapling position Back of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)
Front of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)
Center staple two points (Staple interval is fixed to 145 mm.)
Stapling method Bypass flat clinch
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 371/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
D. Max. paper capacity
E. Type of paper
Main tray
(80 g/m2)
Non-sort, sort, offset,
group offset,
3,000 sheets :A4/A4S, B5/B5S, 8 1 / 2 x 11/
8 1 / 2 x 11S, 16K/16KS,
7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 /7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 S
1,500 sheets :A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8 1 / 4 x 13,
8 1 / 2 x 13, 8 1 / 2 x 13 1 / 4,
8 1 / 2 x 13 1 / 2, 12 x 8, 11 x 17,
8 1 / 2 x 14, 8K
Wide size paper (Max. : 320 mm X 450 mm)
500 sheets :A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 /
5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 S
No. of sheets in
offset mode
Size in the sub
scan direction is
150 to 417 mm
or longer
The others
1 sheet Equivalent to the above capacity
Set of 2 to 9
sheets
300 copies 150 copies
Set of 10 sheets 150 copies 150 copies
Main tray sort staple
No. of sheets
per stapling
Size in the sub
scan direction is
150 to 417 mm
or longer
The others
2 to 9 100 copies 50 copies
10 to 20 50 copies 50 copies
21 to 30 30 copies 30 copies
31 to 40 25 copies 25 copies
41 to 50 20 copies 20 copies
51 to 60 15 copies -
61 to 100 10 copies -
Sub tray (80 g/m2) 100 sheets
Size A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, postcardS, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 S,
8 x 13, 8 1 / 4 x 13, 8 1 / 2 x 13, 8 1 / 8 x 13 1 / 4, 11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 8 1 / 2 x 11, /8 1 / 2 x 11S,
7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 S, 8K, 16K/16KS
Custom size paper, wide size paper, standard size index paper (Upon paper exit,only the leading edge side but not the trailing edge side is guaranteed.)
Min. : 100 mm x 139 mm (4 inch x 5.5 inch)
Max. : 311 mm x 488 mm (12.2 inch x 19.2 inch)
Type Plain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper, speciality paper defined in
the main body specifications, and recommended paper are guaranteed.
Weight 60 to 300 g/m2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 372/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
3
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
F. Machine specifications
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out
G. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
Power
requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption85 W or less
Dimensions
723.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm
28.45 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch848.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm *
33.35 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch *
Weight 60 kg (132.24 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 373/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.1 Main tray
A11PT1C001DA
Alignment platePaper output roller Bypass gate
Main tray
Paper path from the horizontaltransport unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 374/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PAPER FEED PATH
5
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
2.2 Sub tray
A11PT1C002DA
Sub tray change gateSub tray Bypass gate
Paper path from the horizontaltransport unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 375/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 6
2.3 Stapling
A11PT1C003DA
Sub tray change gatePaper output roller Bypass gate
Main tray
Paper path from the horizontaltransport unitStapler
Alignmentsection
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 376/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
• The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal transport section,
transport section, alignment section, exit tray section (main tray), and stapler section.
A11PT2C001DA
Alignment section Horizontal transport section
Stapler section
Transport section
Exit tray section(Main tray)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 377/569
4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION
4.1 Configuration
• The horizontal transport section is composed of the transport control board, transport
motor, fan motor, door open/close sensor, and paper pass sensor.
A11PT2C002DA
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
Door open/close sensor (PS201)Transport control board (TRCB)
Transport motor (M201)
Paper pass sensor (PS202)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 378/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
4.2 Horizontal transport mechanism
4.2.1 Paper transport
• The horizontal transport section transfers paper fed out from the main body to the fin-
isher.
• The transport motor provides drive for the transport rollers.
• On the finisher side, drive from the transport motor transfers the paper into the finisher.
A11PT2C003DA
Transport motor (M201)
Finisher side Main body side
Transport roller
Horizontal transport section
Transport roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 379/569
4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
4.2.2 Fan motor
• The fan motor cools the paper fed out from the main body.
(1) Function
(2) Fan control
A11PT2C002DA
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)
Motor name Function
Fan motor/1 (FM1)Fan motor/2 (FM2)
• In order to avoid toner attachment while the finisher is used, outside air isapplied to the paper to cool it.
Motor name Control Control conditions (outline)
Fan motor/1 (FM1)
Fan motor/2 (FM2)Full speed
• The interior temperature of the main body is 18 °C or more dur-
ing paper exit.
• Continues rotating for a 30-sec. period following the stop of a
print cycle.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 380/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. TRANSPORT SECTION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
5. TRANSPORT SECTION
5.1 Drive
A11PT2C005DA
Transport roller/1
Entrance roller
Transport motor/2 (M2)
Sub tray exit roller/2
Transport motor/1 (M1)
Bypass roller
Sub tray exit roller/1
Sub tray gatesolenoid (SD3)
Bypass transport motor (M3)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
Saddle gate
Switch back solenoid (SD4)
Route change gate solenoid (SD1)
Stacker entrancemotor (M10)
PF transportroller
Z-fold punchregist sensor(PS2)
Bypass gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 381/569
5. TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Route change gate
• The route change gate switches paper to different routes that go to individual trays and
SD-508.
• The FS control board controls the route change gate solenoid.
• The FS operation signal from the main body makes the route change gate move up or
down.
A. Route change gate operation• The route change gate solenoid drives the route change gate.
A11PT2C006DA
Route change gate solenoid (SD1)
Route change gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 382/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. TRANSPORT SECTION
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
5.2.2 Bypass gate
• The bypass route is provided to eliminate loss of time spent for the subsequent paper
and to increase productivity during stapling.
• The bypass gate is provided at the place where the regular route and the bypass route
join.
A. Bypass gate operation• The bypass gate solenoid drives the bypass gate.
• Paper sizes subject to this operation are 8 1 / 2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, and ISO-B5.
The bypass gate operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and following copies to trans-
fer paper to the bypass route.
• The 2nd page of the 2nd and following copies is transferred to the regular route and then
the transferred to the alignment section.
A11PT2C007DA
Regular route
Bypass route
Bypass gate Bypass gate
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 383/569
5. TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
B. Bypass gate control• The bypass gate only operates for the paper (8 1 / 2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, B5, and ISO-
B5).
• The FS control board controls the bypass gate solenoid.
• When stapling two sheets of paper for three copies, the bypass gate solenoid operates
as follows.
(1) For the 1st copy• When the paper for the 1st copy is transferred, the bypass gate solenoid does not oper-
ate.
(2) For the 2nd copy• At the moment when the z-fold punch regist sensor detects the leading edge of the 1st
paper of the 2nd copy, the bypass gate solenoid is turned ON to transfer the 1st paper of
the 2nd copy to the bypass route.
• The bypass gate solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the z-fold
punch regist sensor detects the trailing edge of the 1st paper of the 2nd copy.
(3) For the 3rd and following copies• The same operation as the one for the 2nd copy is repeated.
A11PT2E004DA
Transport motor/1 (M1)
Transport motor/2 (M2)
Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)
The 1st copy The 2nd copy The 3rd copy
Trailing edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy
Leading edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy
Transferring 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy to the bypass
Trailing edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 3rd copy
Leading edge of the 1st paperof the 3rd copy
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 384/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
6.1 Drive
A11PT2C009DA
Main tray
Lift pulley /Up
Lift wire
Lift pulley /Lw
Main tray lift motor (M5)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 385/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Tray lift
A. Tray lift operation• The worm gear installed in the shaft of the main tray lift motor winds up the lift wire.
• It lifts up or down the main tray depending on the winding direction.
• Rotating the lift pulley /Lw clockwise and counterclockwise in view of front, the main tray
is lifted up and down respectively.
B. Paper detection• The main tray top surface sensor and the staple paper exit top surface sensor keep the
specified distance between the upper surface of the paper exited to the main tray and the
paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment of the exited paper.• During the consecutive printing operation, FS counts the number of exited paper and
stops the printing when it reaches the maximum capacity.
• If the exited paper is ejected during the printing operation, the tray moves up and the
main tray empty sensor turns ON and resets the counter. It makes possible to exit paper
with no limitation.
• The main tray lower limit sensor detects the lower limit of the tray.
• During the intermittent printing operation, the main tray lower limit sensor controls the
capacity of the paper exit because the counter does not integrate the total number of
exited paper.
A11PT2C010DA
Main tray
Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)
Main tray emptysensor (PS6)
Main tray lower limitsensor (PS5)
Main tray lift motor (M5)
Lift pulley /Lw
Staple paper exit top surface
sensor (PS7)
Lift pulley /Up
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 386/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
17
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
6.2.2 Exit roller motor
• The exit roller motor is driven by the signal from the FS control board.
• The main tray exit roller is driven by the exit roller motor.
A. Exit roller motor operation• When the 2 staples stacker sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the exit roller
motor rotates.
• After a specified period of time since the 2 staples stacker sensor detected the trailing
edge of paper, the exit roller motor rotates in the reverse direction.
• At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving
down, the exit roller motor starts rotating at high speed. After a specified period of time,
the exit roller motor switches to low speed. After a specified period of time, the exit roller
motor stops.
A11PT2C011DA
Exit roller motor (M4)
Main tray exit roller
<Store paper into alignment section>
<Exit paper into main tray>
Main tray exit roller
Paper
Main tray exit roller
2 staples stackersensor (PS3)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 387/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
6.2.3 Main tray transport
• After the process in the alignment section, the exit roller motor and paper output roller
motor are driven to transfer paper to the main tray.
A. Transport operation• When the paper output roller motor is driven, the paper output roller assy moves down to
be pressed against the main tray exit roller and the paper output roller rotates.
• After paper is transferred to the main tray, the paper output roller assy moves up.
A11PT2C022DA
Paper output roller
Paper output roller motor (M6)
Main tray exit roller
Exit roller motor (M4)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 388/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
19
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
6.2.4 Sub tray exit
• The sub tray change gate is provided to transfer paper conveyed from the horizontal
transport section to the sub tray.
• The sub tray change gate transfers the paper to the sub tray by moving up and down.
• The sub tray gate solenoid drives the sub tray change gate.
A. Sub tray exit roller/1 drive• The sub tray exit roller/1 is driven by the bypass transport motor.
B. Sub tray exit roller/2 drive• The sub tray exit roller/2 is driven by the transport motor/2.
• The transport motor/2 rotates in high speed when the sub tray exit sensor detects the
leading edge of the paper.
• The sub tray exit roller/2 rotates in low speed after a specified period of time since the
FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
• The transport motor/2 stops after a specified period of time since the sub tray exit sensor
detects the trailing edge of the paper.
C. Sub tray full detection• When the exited paper on the sub tray reached to a specified thickness, the sub tray full
sensor turns ON and the sub tray full information is sent to the main body. Then, the main
body displays the message on its display panel.
A11PT2C026DA
Sub tray
Sub tray exit sensor(PS8)
Sub tray change gate
Bypass transportmotor (M3)
Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3)
Sub tray fullsensor (PS9)
Sub tray exitroller/1
Sub tray exit roller/2
Transport motor/2(M2)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 389/569
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7.1 Drive
A11PT2C015DA
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
Alignment plate belt/F
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
Alignment plate belt/R
Alignment plate/R
Trail edge stopper
2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 390/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
21
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Alignment plate
• After sheets of paper are aligned and stapled inside the finisher, they are transferred to
the main tray. With the exit roller separated, each copy set is stored in the alignment sec-
tion at a time.
• The alignment plate motor/F and /R rotate in the forward/reverse direction to open/close
the alignment plate/F and /R to perform the alignment of the paper transferred to thealignment section.
A. Alignment plate operation• The alignment plate motor/F rotates to open/close the alignment plate/F via the align-
ment plate belt/F.
• The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F detects the home position of the align-
ment plate/F.
• The alignment plate motor/R rotates to open/close the alignment plate/R via the align-
ment plate belt/R.
• The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R detects the home position of the align-
ment plate/R.
A11PT2C016DA
Alignment plate/R
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18)
2 staples alignment motorhome sensor/F (PS17)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 391/569
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
22
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
7.2.2 Shift control
• In normal print and staple mode, the paper is fed into the tray at its center position. If no
stapling is involved in the sort or group copy mode, the alignment plate shifts 15 mm to
the front or rear from the center. This stacks copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner,
each being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others.
A11PT2C027DA
<Normal/ Staple> <Shift operation>
30 mm
Alignmentplate/R
Alignmentplate/F
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 392/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
23
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
A. Shift operation• Under sort/group copy mode, after a specified period of time the 2 staples stacker sensor
detected the trailing edge of paper, the alignment plate motor/R and /F are turned ON to
shift the alignment plate/R and /F.
• At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving
down, the alignment motor/F is turned ON. After a specified period of time, the alignment
motor/R is turned ON to open the alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R.
• These operations are repeated for every paper to shift it.
A11PT2C018DA
To the main tray
To the main tray
Alignment plate motor/R (M12)
Alignment plate motor/F (M11)
Alignment plate/F Alignment plate/R
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate/R
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 393/569
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
24
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
7.2.3 Alignment section transport mechanism
• When the paddle motor is driven, it makes the rewind paddle and paddle 1/2 rotate to
transfer paper conveyed from the main body to the alignment section.
• The paper conveyed from the main body drops under its own weight and the paper is
transferred to the alignment section. However, as the paper conveyance performance is
incomplete, the rewind paddle motor is driven to push the rewind paddle downward and
transfer the paper to the alignment section.
A11PT2C021DA
Paddle motor (M16)
Paddle 1
Rewind paddle
Rewind paddle motor(M18)
Paddle 2
Paddle 2
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 394/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. STAPLER
25
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
8. STAPLER
8.1 Drive
A11PT2C023DA
2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) Stapler drive rack
Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50)
Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51)Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)
Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 395/569
8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
26
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
8.2 Operation
8.2.1 Stapler movement
A. Stapler movement operation• The 2 staples stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
• The rotation of the 2 staples stapler movement motor makes the belt rotate the gear,
causing the stapler drive rack to operate with the stapler.
• The stapler position sensor/4 becomes the stapler’s home position. In 2 staples mode,the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/3 and stapler position sensor/2 to staple
sheets. In the one-corner stapling mode, the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/
1 to staple sheets.
B. Stapler movement control• With the FS start signal from the main body, the 2 staples stapler movement motor is
turned ON and the stapler moves to the standby position and stops.
A11PT2C024DA
2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) Stapler drive rack
Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50)
Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51)Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)
Stapler position sensor/4 (PS53)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 396/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. STAPLER
27
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 6
8.2.2 Stapler control
• The stapling operation is performed by the 2 staples stapler motor.
A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the 2 staples stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the
paper. Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
A11PT2C025DA
Paper
Stapler (clincher side)
Stapler (stapler side)
2 staples staplermotor (M14)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 397/569
8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
28
F S - 5 2 6
O P E R A T I O N
B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the 2 staples stapler
motor performs the stapling operation.
• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler position sensor/4 in the stapler
detects the home position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the 2
staples stapler motor turns OFF if the stapler position sensor/4 does not turn ON after a
specified period of time since they turn OFF.
(3) Cartridge detection• The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a
cartridge.
• When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error message
on its display panel.
(4) Staple detection control• When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays
the error message on its display panel.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 398/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 399/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 400/569
S D - 5 0 8
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
SD-508
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 3
2.1 Folding/saddle stitching ........................................................................................3
2.2 Tri-folding .............................................................................................................. 4
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 6
4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................7
4.2.1 Alignment ...................................................................................................... 7
4.2.2 Stopper ......................................................................................................... 9
5. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 13
5.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 13
5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 14
5.2.1 Stapler movement ....................................................................................... 145.2.2 Stapling ....................................................................................................... 16
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING .................................................. 18
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 19
6.2.1 Folding knife................................................................................................ 19
6.2.2 Folding transfer ........................................................................................... 20
6.2.3 Tri-folding gate............................................................................................. 21
7. EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 227.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 22
7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 23
7.2.1 Exit .............................................................................................................. 23
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 401/569
S D - 5 0 8
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 402/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 8
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Paper(1) Saddle stitching
(2) Folding
(3) Tri-folding
*: It is not guaranteed when folding together more than 2 sheets.
C. Machine specifications
Name Saddle sticher SD-508
Type Built into the finisher
Installation Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment Center
Stapling function Center parallel two points
Type Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2
Size
A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 8KS
Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1
/ 4 x 11Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1 / 4 x 18
Max. saddle stitching capacity
20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 ,16 to 21.25 lb)
16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,21.5 to 24 lb)
19 sheets 80 g/m2 ,21.25 lb) + 1 sheet (209 g/m2 , 55.5 lb)
Type Plain paper
Size
A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 8KS
Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1
/ 4 x 11Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1 / 4 x 18
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb)
Type Plain paper
Size A4S, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 16KS
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb) *
Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the finisher)
DC 5 V
Max. power consumption 40 W or less
Dimensions281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)
11.07 inch (W) x 23.48 inch (D) x 20.86 inch (H)
WeightApprox. 22.6 kg + 3.8 kg (Exit tray)
Approx. 49.75 lb + 8.5 lb (Exit tray)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 403/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 8
D. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
E. Consumables• Staples 5000 (MS-5C)
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 404/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PAPER FEED PATH
3
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 8
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.1 Folding/saddle stitching
A11RT1C001DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 405/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 8
2.2 Tri-folding
A11RT1C002DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 406/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
A11RT2C001DA
Exit section
Alignment section
Stapler
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 407/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
4.1 Drive
A11RT2C002DA
Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M20)
Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M21)
Alignment plate/FAlignment plate/R
Leading edge stopper
Leading edge stopper motor (M22)
Leading edgestopper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 408/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Alignment
• In the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and
/R aligns paper.
• The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the
alignment plates and align paper.
• The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make theleading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction.
A. Alignment operation• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via
the alignment belts.• The center staple alignment motor home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the
alignment plates.
• The leading edge stopper motor rotates to make the leading edge stopper oscillate via
the belt.
A11RT2C003DA
Center staple alignment motor/F (M20)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M21)
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate/R
Leading edge stopper
Leading edge stopper motor (M22)
Center staple alignmentmotor home sensor/F(PS30)
Center staple alignmentmotor home sensor/R(PS31)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 409/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
B. Alignment control• Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body, the center staple alignment motor/F and
/R rotate to close the alignment plates, and then they stop the alignment plates at the
standby position that is a little wider than the paper width.
• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating
in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a
specified period of time since the center staple pass sensor detects the trailing edge of
the paper.• The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make the
leading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction. (This is
made from the 11th sheet of paper.)
• The alignment operation is performed for every paper.
A11RT2E019DB
Center staple alignment motorhome sensor/R (PS31)
Center staple alignment motorhome sensor/F (PS30)
Center staple pass sensor(PS12)Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M21)
Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M20)
Leading edge stopper motor(M22)
Closing the alignmentplate (FNS signal)
Standby position ofthe alignment plate
Alignment operation forevery paper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 410/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
4.2.2 Stopper
• At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers
conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.
• The exit grip holds the paper when shifting it to the specified position and when stapling
papers.
• The stopping position in vertical direction of paper conveyed to the alignment section is
different among the folding mode, the saddle stitching mode, and the tri-folding mode.
A. Stopper operation• The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accor-
dance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home
position.
A11RT2C005DA
Leading edge stopper
Exit grip
Leading edge stopper motor (M22)
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32)
Exit grip
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 411/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
B. Stopper control(1) Folding mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip
solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.
• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,
the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment whenthe transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts
rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance
with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.
A11RT2E020DA
Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M20)
Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M21)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor (PS34)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Leading edge stopper motor(M22)
Transport motor(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Last paper of the copy aligned Moving to the foldingposition for the papersize
Moving to stand by for thepaper of the subsequent copy
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 412/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
(2) Saddle stitching mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip
solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.
• After a specified period of time since stapling operation was completed, the center staple
alignment motor/F and /R opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper
motor starts rotating to move the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paperto the folding position.
• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,
the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment when
the transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts
rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance
with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.
A11RT2E021DA
Center staple alignment motor/R(M21)Center staple alignment motor/F(M20)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Leading edge stopper motor(M22)
Center staple motor (M23)
Staple motor (M24)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor(PS34)
Transport motor(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Last paper of the copy aligned
Moving to the saddle stitchingposition for the paper size
Stapling operation Moving to the foldingposition for the paper size
Moving to stand by for thepaper of the subsequent copy
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 413/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
(3) Tri-folding mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip
solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the 1st folding position in the tri-fold-
ing.
• At the moment when the center fold knife home sensor is turned ON, the transport motor
is turned ON to start rotating at low speed. At the moment when the transport motor isaccelerated to middle speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move the
leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance with the paper size and
stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.
A11RT2E022DA
Center staple alignment motor/R(M21)Center staple alignment motor/F(M20)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Leading edge stopper motor(M22)Tri-folding change solenoid(SD5)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Center fold knife home sensor(PS34)
Transport motor(M33)
High speed
Low speed
Middle speed
Last paper of the copy aligned
Moving to the 1st foldingposition for the paper size
Moving to the alignment positionfor the subsequent copy
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 414/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. STAPLER
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
5. STAPLER
5.1 Drive
A11RT2C009DA
Timing belt
Stapler home sensor (PS33)
Stapler
Clincher
Center staple motor (M23)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 415/569
5. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Stapler movement
A. Stapler movement operation• The center staple motor moves the stapler.
• The stapler and the clincher are mounted at the timing belt.
• The stapler home sensor detects the distance between the stapler and the clincher.
A11RT2C009DA
Timing belt
Stapler home sensor (PS33)
Stapler
Clincher
Center staple motor (M23)Staple motor (M24)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 416/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. STAPLER
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
B. Stapler movement control• At the moment when the center staple alignment motor /F is turned OFF, the center sta-
ple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the front side.
• After a specified period of time since the staple motor was turned OFF, the center staple
motor starts rotating and moves the stapler to the rear side.
• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife motor was turned OFF, the cen-
ter staple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the paper passage center position.
A11RT2E023DA
Center staple alignment motor/R(M21)Center staple alignment motor/F(M20)
Exit grip solenoid (SD6)
Center staple motor (M23)
Staple motor (M24)
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Moving to the stapling position(front size) for the paper size
Moving to the stapling position (rear size) for the paper size
Moving to the paper passagecenter position for the paper size
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 417/569
5. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
5.2.2 Stapling
• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor and the clincher motor.
A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press sec-
tion to the clincher by the cam mechanism to hold the paper and punch out the staple.
Then, the clincher motor in the stapler bends the staple.
A11RT2C012DA
Stapler Paper
Clincher
Staple
Paper press
section
Cammechanism
Staple
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 418/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. STAPLER
17
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor per-
forms the stapling operation.
• After a specified period of time, the clincher motor bends the staple.
• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor detects the home
position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the
center staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home
position if the stapler home sensor does not turn ON after a specified period of time
since it turn OFF.
(3) Cartridge detection• The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a
cartridge.
• When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error messageon its display panel.
(4) Staple detection control• When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays
the error message on its display panel.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 419/569
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING
6.1 Drive
A11RT2C013DA
Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
Tri-folding gate
Folding roller
Tri-folding roller
Folding knife
Center fold knife motor (M32)
Transport motor (M33)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 420/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING
19
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Folding knife
• The center fold knife motor drives the folding knife.
• The folding knife is used in the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode.
• In the tri-folding mode, it is used at the 1st folding.
A. Folding knife operation• The center fold knife motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the
paper to the nip section with the folding knife.
• The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
• The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
B. Folding knife control• The center fold knife motor turns ON and sticks out the folding knife to the paper after a
specified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
• The center fold knife motor stops when the folding knife reciprocates and the center fold
knife home sensor turns OFF.
A11RT2C014DA
Fold knife
Paper
Folding roller
Leading edge stopper
Center fold knifehome sensor (PS34)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 421/569
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
6.2.2 Folding transfer
• The transport motor drives the folding roller.
• Then, the folding roller drives the tri-folding roller.
A. Folding transfer control• The center fold knife motor turns ON after a specified period of time since the leading
edge stopper stops at the folding position.
• When the center fold knife motor turns ON the center fold knife home sensor, the trans-
port motor turns ON and drives the folding roller to perform the 1st folding and the tri-fold-
ing roller to perform the 2nd folding at the tri-folding operation, and then it exits the paper
to the exit tray.
• The transport motor stops after a specified period of time since the fold sensor detects
the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
A11RT2E024DA
Center fold knife motor (M32)Center fold knife home sensor (PS34)
Leading edge stopper motor(M22)
Transport motor(M33)
Fold sensor (PS27)
High speed
Low speed
Leading edge stopper moved
Paper pressed to the folding roller by the folding knife
Paper fold
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 422/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING
21
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
6.2.3 Tri-folding gate
• The tri-folding gate switches between the folding/saddle stitching path and the tri-folding
path.
• The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate.
A. Tri-folding 2nd folding operation• The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the
tri-folding path for leading the paper exited from the folding roller to the tri-folding stopper.
• To perform the 2nd folding, the loop formed when the paper contacts with the tri-folding
stopper are drawn between the folding roller and the tri-folding roller. Then the paper is
exited to the exit tray.
• The position of the tri-folding stopper determines the folding position in the 2nd folding.
B. Tri-folding gate control• After the leading edge stopper stops at the tri-folding position, the tri-folding change sole-
noid turns ON and drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the tri-folding
stopper.• The tri-folding change solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the fold
sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
A11RT2C016DA
Fold sensor (PS27)
Tri-folding roller
Exit tray
Tri-foldingroller
Loop
Folding roller
Tri-folding stopper Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 423/569
7. EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
22
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
7. EXIT SECTION
7.1 Drive
A11RT2C017DA
Lift up switch (SW3)
Exit motor (M34)
SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)
SD exit full sensor(PS35)
Belt
SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)
SD exit sensor/LED (PS28)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 424/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. EXIT SECTION
23
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 8
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Exit
• Turn ON the exit motor to drive the belt and convey papers by each copy set.
• Press the lift up switch of ahead of the exit tray to covey papers to ahead of the exit tray
randomly.
A. Exit drive• The exit motor rotates the belt and conveys exited papers.
B. Exit control• After a specified period of time since the SD exit sensor/LED and /PR was turned ON,
the exit motor starts rotating to turn the belt.
• After a specified period of time since the SD exit full sensor was turned OFF, the exit
motor stops.
C. Exit tray full detection
• The SD exit upper limit sensor and the SD exit full sensor detect the exit tray paper full.• It determines the exit tray is full if the exited paper shields the SD exit upper limit sensor
and the SD exit full sensor for the specified period of time.
A11RT2C018DA
SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)
SD exit full sensor (PS35)
Paper
Belt
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 425/569
7. EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
24
S D - 5 0 8
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 426/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 427/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 428/569
P K - 5 1 6
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
PK-516
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2
3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................3
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................. 5
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 5
4.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6
4.2.1 Punch shift drive ........................................................................................... 6
4.2.2 Punch drive ................................................................................................... 7
4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................9
4.3.1 Punch standby position movement control ................................................... 9
4.3.2 Punch position correction control................................................................ 10
4.3.3 Punch control .............................................................................................. 11
5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION ........................................................................ 15
5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 155.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 15
5.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 15
5.3.1 Punch scraps box control............................................................................ 15
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 429/569
P K - 5 1 6
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 430/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
1
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 6
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Punch unit
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes 2-3 holes / 2-4 holes / 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch
2 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 108 mm pitch
2 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch - 4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode Punch mode, through mode
Applicable post processingmode Sort, group, staple
Size
2 hole/Sweden 4 hole punch setting:
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S,
8 x 13, 8 x 13S, 8-1 / 4 x 13, 8-1 / 2 x 13, 8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 4, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14,
8-1 / 2 x 11/8-1 / 2 x 11S, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2S, 8K, 16K/16KS
7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2S, 8-2 / 3 x 13S, 8-1 / 2 x 13S, 8-1 / 4 x 13S,
8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 4S, 8-1 / 2 x 13-1 / 2S
3 hole/4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5
11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 11, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 8K, 16K
Supported paperPlain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper
(Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight 60 to 300 g/m2 (16 to 80 lb)
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,
and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch unit
or the punch blade
Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the main body)
DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power consumption 30 W or less
Dimensions146.2 mm (W) x 639.2 mm (D) x 233.8 mm (H)
5.75 inch (W) x 25.16 inch (D) x 9.2 inch (H)
Weight 4.5 kg (9.92 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 431/569
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 6
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION
A11TT2C001DA
Punch section
Punch scraps box section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 432/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. PAPER PATH
3
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 6
3. PAPER PATH
A11TT2C002DA
Punch scraps box
Paper path fromthe main body
Punch unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 433/569
3. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 6
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 434/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PUNCH SECTION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. PUNCH SECTION
4.1 Configuration
NOTE• North America, Europe andSweden are same configuration except for a number of
blades.
A11TT2E011DA
Punch unit
Entrance roller
Punch blade
Punch blade
Punch unit
Front
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 435/569
4. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
4.2 Drive
4.2.1 Punch shift drive
A11TT2E012DA
Guide shaft
Rack
Punch oscillating motor (M302)
Belt
Punch unitFront
Punch blade
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 436/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PUNCH SECTION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
4.2.2 Punch drive
A. North America (2 to 3 holes)
B. Europe (2 to 4 holes)
A11TT2E013DA
Punch drive motor (M301)
Punch blades forthe 3-hole punch
Punch blades forthe 2-hole punch
Slot
Punch drive plateFront
A11TT2E014DA
Punch drive motor (M301)
Punch blades for the2 and 4-hole punch
Punch blades forthe 4-hole punch
Slot
Punch drive plateFront
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 437/569
4. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
C. PK-516 for Sweden (4 holes)
A11TT2E015DA
Punch drive motor (M301)
Punch blades for the 4-hole punch
FrontPunch drive plate
Slot
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 438/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PUNCH SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
4.3 Operation
4.3.1 Punch standby position movement control
Turning ON the device, the punch oscillating motor rotates to move the punch unit to the
home position until the PK punch oscillating home sensor turns ON.
After selecting a punch mode, one of five sensors corresponded to each paper size detects
a paper and the punch unit is shifted.
The punch unit returns to the home position at the end of the job.
NOTE• The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is
contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.
A11TT2E016DA
Punch blade
Side edge reference position
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Punch unit
Paper transfer direction
Paper
<Example: A4 size>
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 439/569
4. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
4.3.2 Punch position correction control
For the punch unit positioned from the side edge of the paper to the inside, the punch posi-
tion is adjusted in the following procedure so that punching is made to the center of paper
at all times. The punch position correction is operated by moving the punch unit back and
forth while conveying the paper.
• When the FNS pass sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the punch unit is
moved to the front side until the paper size detect board detects the side edge of the
paper.
Then, the punch unit is moved to the rear side until the paper size detect board detects
the side edge of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).
• Once it detects the side edge reference position, the punch unit is moved further so that
the center of the punch blade is positioned to the center of the paper. The moving dis-
tance and its direction are depending on the paper size.
NOTE• The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is
contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.
A11TT2E017DA
Punch blades
Punch unit
Center of the punch blade
Paper size detect board (PSDTB)
Side edge reference position
Rear sideFront side
Punch unit moving direction
Center of the paper Paper
Paper
transferdirection
<Example: A4 size>
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 440/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PUNCH SECTION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
4.3.3 Punch control
A. Registration loop controlThe transport motor/1 turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the speci-
fied time has passed since paper exit sensor detected the leading edge of the paper. Thus
the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When
the specified time has passed, the transport motor/1 turns ON to restart conveying the
paper.
The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper and in the non-punch-
ing mode.
A11TT2C008DA
Entrance roller Entrance roller
PK
Loop
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 441/569
4. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
B. Punch controlTransmitting the start signal from the main body, the transport motor/1 rotates.
In the punch mode, the transport motor/1 stops temporarily a specified period of time after
the FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.
At the same time, the punch drive motor is driven to move the punch drive plate horizon-
tally. The punch drive plate has slots to shift punch blades up and down. Punch blades
moving downward conduct the punch operation. The punch drive motor stops and the
punch operation is completed when the PK punch home sensor turns ON.The transport motor/1 rotates again to convey the paper a specified period of time after it
stops temporarily.
North America (2 to 3 holes)
A11TT2E018DA
Punch driver motor (M301)
Punch blade
Punch unit
Slot Punch drive plate
Front
PK punch homesensor (PS301)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 442/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PUNCH SECTION
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
Europe (2 to 4 holes)
A11TT2E019DA
Punch driver motor (M301)Punch blade
Punch unit
Slot Punch drive plate
Front
PK punch homesensor (PS301)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 443/569
4. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
Sweden (4 holes)
A11TT2E020DA
Punch driver motor (M301)
Punch blades
Punch unit
Slot Punch drive plate
Front
PK punch homesensor (PS301)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 444/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 6
5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION
5.1 Configuration
5.2 Drive
• The punch scraps box section comprises no moving parts.
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Punch scraps box control
A. Punch scraps box full detectionThe punch scraps generated by the punch operation falls in the punch scraps box. The PK
punch scraps box full sensor turns ON and transmits the “no punch scraps box” information
to the main body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps.
B. Punch scraps box detectionThe PK punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is set or not.
The PK punch scraps box set sensor turns OFF and transmits the “no punch scraps box”
information to the main body if the punch scraps box is not set.
A11TT2E021DA
PK punch scraps boxfull sensor (PS302)
PK punch scraps boxset sensor (PS304)
Punch scraps box
Front
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 445/569
5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
P K - 5 1 6
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 446/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 447/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 448/569
J S -
6 0 2
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
JS-602
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION2. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION................................................................................... 4
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION................................................................................... 5
4.1 Job tray paper transport mechanism.................................................................... 5
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 449/569
J S - 6 0 2
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 450/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
J S - 6 0 2
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Job separator
Type Add-on finishing device externally mounted on top of finisher
Installation Fixed to finisher
Document alignment Center
Modes Group, Sort (during copy, print, or fax mode)
Type Size Weight Tray capacity
Plain paper
A5S to A3
5-1/2 × 8-1/2S to
11 × 17
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
100 sheets:
A4, 8-1/2 × 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
50 sheets:
except A4, 8-1/2 × 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
(Height: up to 28 mm, 1.1 inch)
Power requirements DC 5 V, DC 24 V (supplied from finisher)
Dimensions 341 mm (W) × 537 mm (D) × 149 mm (H)13.43 inch (W) × 21.14 inch (D) × 5.87 inch (H)
Weight 1.75 kg (3.86 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 451/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
J S - 6 0 2
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 452/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
J S -
6 0 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
2. CONFIGURATION
A01CT2C001DA
Job tray Job separator cover
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 453/569
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
J S - 6 0 2
O P E R A T I O N
3. CENTER CROSS SECTION
A01CT2C002DA
Job separator exit roller
Job separator exit roll Job separator transport roller
Job separator transport roll
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 454/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
J S -
6 0 2
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
4.1 Job tray paper transport mechanism
• The job separator transport roller and job separator exit roller turn to transport the paper
into the job tray as the motor is energized.
• The 3rd entrance switching solenoid is energized to select the paper path into the job
tray.
Job separator transport roller
Job separator exit roller
Bypass transport motor(M3-FN)
3rd entrance switching solenoid(SD404)
Paper
SD404
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 455/569
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
J S - 6 0 2
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 456/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 457/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 458/569
P I - 5 0 5
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
PI-505
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
2.1 Auto sheet feeding (online operation) ...................................................................2
2.2 Manual sheet feeding (offline operation) .............................................................. 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................4
4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4
4.1.1 Paper feed drive............................................................................................4
4.1.2 Tray lift drive .................................................................................................. 5
4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................6
4.2.1 Tray lift mechanism ....................................................................................... 6
4.2.2 Pick-up mechanism....................................................................................... 7
4.2.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................. 8
4.2.4 Registration control ....................................................................................... 94.2.5 Paper size detection control........................................................................ 10
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 459/569
P I - 5 0 5
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 460/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
P I - 5 0 5
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Post inserter
Type Torque limiter separation type seat feeding device
Auto sheet feeding
(online operation)
Feeds the sheet to finisher automatically under the instruction from the main
body.
Manual sheet feeding
(offline operation)
Feeds the sheet to finisher under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
You can select the following 5 post processing modes:
• 1 staple/back mode
• 2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
• Punch mode (when PK-516 is installed on finisher)
• Saddle stitching mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)• Tri-folding mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)
Size Tray /Up A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5
8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 1 / 2 x 11S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2S, 16K, 16KS
Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 297 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
Tray /Lw A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5
8 x 13S, 8 1 / 4 x 13S, 8 1 / 2 x 13S, 8 1 / 8 x 13 1 / 4S, SRA4S, 12 x 18,
11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 8 1 /
2 x 11, 8 1 /
2 x 11S, 5 1 /
2 x 8 1 /
2, 8K, 16K,
16KS, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2S
Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 457.2 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)
TypePlain paper, recycle paper, color paper, special paper, coated paper,
high-quality paper
Weight 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (16 to 55.5 lb)
Capacity Tray /Up 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height
Tray /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height
Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)
Max. power
consumption30 W or less
Dimensions 511 mm (W) x 635 mm (D) x 220 mm (H)
20.12 inch (W) x 25 inch (D) x 8.66 inch (H)
Weight 10.5 kg (23.15 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 461/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
P I - 5 0 5
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.1 Auto sheet feeding (online operation)
2.2 Manual sheet feeding (offline operation)
A10AT1C001DA
Paper path from the tray /Up
Paper path from the tray /Lw
A10AT1C002DA
Paper path from the tray /Lw
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 462/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P I - 5 0 5
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
A10AT2C001DA
Tray /Up section Pick-up /Up section
Separation /Upsection
Transfersection
Separation /Lw section
Pick-up /Lw section
Tray /Lw section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 463/569
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
P I - 5 0 5
O P E R A T I O N
4. PAPER FEED SECTION
4.1 Drive
4.1.1 Paper feed drive
A10AT2C002DA
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)
Pick-up roller /Up and /Lw
Paper feed roller /Up and /Lw
Pick-up solenoid /Up, /Lw(SD201, SD202)
Front
Pick-up roller /Lw
Pick-up roller /Up
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)
Paper feed roller /Up
Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)
Separation roller /Up
Transfer roller /Up
Registrationclutch (CL203)
Paper feed roller /Lw
Transfer roller /Lw
Separation roller /Lw
Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)
Transfer motor (M203)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 464/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER FEED SECTION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P I - 5 0 5
4.1.2 Tray lift drive
A10AT2C003DA
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
Front
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 465/569
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
P I - 5 0 5
O P E R A T I O N
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Tray lift mechanism
• The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw move up and down the trays /Up and /Lw by rotating in
the forward and reverse direction to drive the lift arms /Up and /Lw and move up and
down the lift plates /Up and /Lw, respectively.
• At the upper limit positions, the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actuators
lifted up by the lift plates.• At the lower position of the tray, the tray lower limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actua-
tors coupled with the lift arms /Up and /Lw.
A10AT2C004DA
Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204)
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
Tray upperlimit sensor
/Lw (PS209)
Lift arm /LwTray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
Tray lift plate /Lw
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
Tray lift plate /Up
Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) Lift arm /Up
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 466/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER FEED SECTION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P I - 5 0 5
4.2.2 Pick-up mechanism
• The pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON to pick up the paper.
• The release arm held upward by the spring lifts up the pick-up roller mounting plate to
release the pick-up roller.
• When the pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON, the release arm moves backward, and
then the pick-up roller mounting plate and the pick-up roller fall down by their own weight.
• The pick-up roller driven by the transfer motor presses the paper and picks it up to trans-
fer it to the separation section.
A10AT2C005DA
Spring
Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)Pick-up roller
Pick-up roller mounting plate Release arm
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 467/569
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
P I - 5 0 5
O P E R A T I O N
4.2.3 Separation mechanism
• The separation roller is driven to rotate in the opposite direction from the paper transfer
direction. When transferring no or 1 sheet of paper, the separation roller rotates in the
paper transfer direction to transfer the paper to the paper transfer section because the
frictional force between the paper feed roller or the paper and the separation roller is
stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.
• When transferring 2 or more sheets of paper, the separation roller rotates in the reverse
direction to prevent the bottom sheet from being transferred because the frictional force
between the sheets is stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.
A10AT2C006DA
Paper feed roller
Paper transferdirection
Torque limiter
Separation roller
2nd sheet
1st sheet
Pick-up roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 468/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER FEED SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P I - 5 0 5
4.2.4 Registration control
• Transmitting the FS start signal, the transfer motor rotates in low speed and the pick-up
solenoids /UP and /Lw turn ON. At the time, the tray lift motors /Up and /Lw rotate in the
forward direction to lift up the trays /Up and /Lw.
• The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw stop when the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw turn
ON, and after a specified period of time, the transfer clutches /Up and /Lw turn ON and
the paper is picked up from the tray. Only 1 sheet of paper is transferred by the transfer
roller because of the separation roller.
• The transfer motor rotates in high speed when the paper reaches the paper entrance
sensors /Up and /Lw. At the time, the paper is pressed against the transfer roller and
forms a loop because the registration clutch is OFF. After a specified period of time, the
registration clutch turns ON and the transfer motor drives the paper to FS.
• The transfer motor switches to rotate in low speed to feed the subsequent paper since
the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw, and then the registration
clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.
A10AT2C007DA
FS start signal turned ON Tray reached at the upper limit
Paper reached the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw
Registration clutch turned ON
Trailing edge of the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw
Transfer motor(M203)
Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)
Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
Registration clutch (CL203)
253 mm/s
670 mm/s
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 469/569
4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
P I - 5 0 5
O P E R A T I O N
4.2.5 Paper size detection control
• The paper size VRs /Up and /Lw coupled with the side guide detects the paper size in
the main scan direction.
• The paper set sensors /Up and /Lw and the L size sensor /Lw detects the paper size in
the sub scan direction.
A10AT2C008DA
Paper size VR /Up (VR201)
Side guide plate
Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)
Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
L size sensor /Lw (PS212)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 470/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 471/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 472/569
F S - 5 2 7
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
FS-527
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Tray1 ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Tray2 ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.3 Stapling................................................................................................................. 6
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 7
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION............................................................... 8
4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8
4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism ......................................................................9
4.2.1 Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 9
4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism ........................................... 10
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................... 11
5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 125.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 13
5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate ................................................................. 13
5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate............................................................................ 14
5.3.3 Conveyance operation ................................................................................ 15
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 18
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18
6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 19
6.2.1 Tray lift.........................................................................................................196.2.2 Exit to tray1 ................................................................................................. 20
6.2.3 Exit to tray2 ................................................................................................. 21
6.2.4 Tray2 shift control ........................................................................................23
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................25
7.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 25
7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 26
7.2.1 Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 26
7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism ................................................27
8. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 28
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 473/569
F S - 5 2 7
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
8.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 28
8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 29
8.2.1 Stapler movement....................................................................................... 29
8.2.2 Stapler control............................................................................................. 30
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 474/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type(1) Non sort/sort/group
*: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.
Name Multi staple finisher
Type Freestanding
Document
alignmentCenter
Consumables Staples
Modes Sort, group, offset, group offset, sort staple
Type Size Weight Max. capacity
Plain paper
Recycled
paper
A6S, A5S/A5, B5S/B5,
B6S, A4S/A4, B4, A3,
A3Wide
5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S/5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2,
8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,
8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17,
12 1 / 4 x 18
Tray1 (Sub tray)
Max.
311.15 mm x 1200 mm
12.25 x 47.24 inch
Min.
90 mm x 139.7 mm
3.54 x 5.5 inch
Tray2 (Main tray)
Max.
311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
12.25 x 18 inch
Min.
100 mm x 139.7 mm
3.94 x 5.5 inch
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Exit
tray1200 sheets
Exit
tray2
A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S
or less
3,000
sheets
B4, 8 1 / 2 x 14
or greater
1,500
sheets
A5S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S
or less
500
sheets
Envelope —
20 sheets
OHP
transparencies—
Label —
Letterhead —
Thick paper 191 to 120 g/m2
24.25 to 32 lb
Thick paper 1+121 to 157 g/m2
32.25 to 41.75 lb
Thick paper 2158 to 209 g/m2
42 to 55.5 lb
Thick paper 3210 to 256 g/m2
55.75 to 68 lb
Thick paper 4257 to 300 g/m2
68.25 to 80 lb
Long size
paper *
210 mm to 297 mm x
457.2 mm to 1200 mm
127 to 160 g/m2
33.75 to 42.5 lb—
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 475/569
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
(2) Sort offset/group offset
*: 2,000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted
(3) Sort staple
Type Size Weight Max. capacity
Plain paper
Recycled
paper
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4,
A3, A3Wide
8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,
8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 1 / 4 x 18
Max.311.15 mm x 457.2 mm
12.25 x 18 inch
Min.
182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.17 x 5.85 inch
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Exit
tray2
A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S
or less
3,000
sheets *
B4, 8 1 / 2 x 14
or greater
1,500
sheets
A5500
sheets
Thick paper91 to 300 g/m2
24.25 to 80 lb—
Type Size Weight No. of sheetsto be stapled
Max. capacity Max.
No. ofsheets
to be
stapled
A4S,
8-1 / 2 X 11S
or less
B4,
8-1 / 2 X 14
or greater
Plain paper
Recycled
paper
A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4,
B4, A3
8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,
8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17
Max.
297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Min.
182 mm x 148.5 mm
7.25 x 5.75 inch
60 to 90 g/m2
16 to 24 lb
Exit
tray2
2 to 9
sheets100 copies 50 copies
50
sheets
10 to 20
sheets50 copies 50 copies
21 to 30
sheets30 copies 30 copies
31 to 40
sheets 25 copies 25 copies
41 to 50
sheets20 copies 20 copies
Thick
paper
91 to 209 g/m2
24.25 to 55.5 lb
—30
sheets
—15
sheets
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 476/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
3
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
D. Stapling
E. Machine specifications
*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out
F. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Stapling position
Back/Front of the corner
(45 degree)
A4, A3
8 1 / 2 x 11, 11 x 17
Back/Front of the corner
(35 degree)B5, B4
Back/Front of the corner
(Parallel)
A4S, B5S, A58 1 / 2 x 11S, 8 1 / 2 x 14
Side: Parallel 2 pointA4S/A4, A3, B5S/B5, B4, A5
8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17
Manual staple None
Power
requirementsDC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)
Max. powerconsumption
56 W or less
Dimensions
528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm
20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch
658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *
25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *
Weight 42 kg (92.59 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 477/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
2. PAPER FEED PATH
2.1 Tray1
A0HRT1C001DB
Tray1 exit rollerTray1
Tray1 path switching gate
Paper path from the horizontalconveyance unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 478/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PAPER FEED PATH
5
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
2.2 Tray2
A0HRT1C002DB
Tray2
Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate
Paper path from the horizontalconveyance unit
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 479/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
O U T L I N E
F S - 5 2 7
2.3 Stapling
A0HRT1C003DB
Tray2 exit roller
Tray2
Alignment sectionStapler
Paper path from the horizontalconveyance unit
Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 480/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
• The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal conveyance section,
conveyance section, alignment section, tray1, tray2, and stapler section.
A0HRT2C002DB
Alignment section
Tray2
Stapler section
Horizontal conveyancesectionConveyance section
Tray1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 481/569
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
4.1 Configuration
• The horizontal conveyance section is composed of the duplex path switching sensor,
paper passage sensor/1, horizontal conveyance cover sensor, paper passage sensor/2,
paper passage motor/1, and duplex path switching motor.
A0HRT2C001DA
Paper passagemotor/1 (M1)
Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)
Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)Duplex path switching motor (M2)
Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)
Horizontal conveyance coversensor (PS5)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 482/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism
4.2.1 Paper conveyance
• In the horizontal conveyance section, the paper passage motor/1 drives the conveyance
rollers to convey paper fed out from the fusing section of the main body to the finisher.
A0HRT2C003DA
Horizontal conveyance section
Main body sideFinisher side
Conveyance roller
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 483/569
4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism
• The horizontal conveyance section is provided with a path switching mechanism for con-
veying paper fed from the fusing section onto the duplex section or tray3 (when another
option of JS-603 is mounted).
• The paper path is changed by the duplex path switching motor and the path switching
guide.
A. Operation• The path switching guide swings up or down when the duplex path switching motor is
energized.
• The duplex path switching sensor detects the position of the path switching guide.
A0HRT2C024DA
Duplex path switchingsensor (PS3)
Duplex path switchingmotor (M2)
Path switching guide
Path switching guide position Duplex path switching sensor
Swung-up position (paper to finisher) Unblocking
Swung-down position (paper to duplex section) Blocking
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 484/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
5.1 Configuration
A0HRT2C025DB
Conveyance motor (M4)
Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Exit motor (M5)
Registrationroller
Switchback rollerTray2 exit roller
Tray1 exit roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 485/569
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Drive
A0HRT2C004DC
Conveyance motor (M4)
Paper passage motor/2 (M3)
Exit motor (M5)Tray1 exit roller
Exit driven roller
Tray2 exit roller
Conveyanceroller 2
Paper passage roller
Conveyance roller 1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 486/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
5.3 Operation
5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate
• The upper lower path switching gate switches the paper conveyance path that go to indi-
vidual trays and SD-509.
• The paper exit command from the main body moves the upper lower path switching gate
up or down as necessary.
A. Upper lower path switching gate operation• The upper lower path switching motor drives the upper lower path switching gate.
A0HRT2C005DB
Upper lower path switching motor (M6)
Upper lower path switching gate
Upper lower pathswitching gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 487/569
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate
• The tray1 path switching gate changes the path between one toward the tray1 and one
toward the bypass.
A. Tray1 path switching gate operation• The tray1 path switching gate is operated by the tray1 path switching motor.
• When the tray1 path switching motor is energized, the tray1 path switching gate swings
up or down.
• The tray1 path switching home sensor detects the position of the tray1 path switching
gate, either the swung-up or swung-down position.
A0HRT2C006DB
Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)
Tray1 path switchingmotor (M8)
Tray1 path switching gate
Tray1 path switching gate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 488/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
5.3.3 Conveyance operation
A. Tray1 conveyance• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed via the registra-
tion roller, upper lower path switching gate, and tray1 path switching gate. It is then fed
out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller.
B. Tray2 conveyance• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed onto the align-
ment section by way of the registration roller, paper passage roller, switchback roller, and
lower path roller.
A0HRT2C008DB
Registration roller
Upper lower path switching gate
Tray1 exit roller
Tray1 path switching gate
Tray1
A0HRT2C007DB
Paper passage roller
Lower path roller
Switchback roller
Tray2 Registration roller
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 489/569
5. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
C. Bypass route• The bypass route is provided to eliminate any time loss during stapling operation relative
to the subsequent sheet of paper and to achieve high productivity.
The following describe how two copy sets/stacks are produced as an output, each con-
sisting of two sheets of paper stapled together.
(1) For the 1st copy
• The bypass route is not used for the paper path for the first copy set/stack.
(2) For the 2nd copy• The first sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack passes through the path to tray2,
but is fed and temporarily brought into a standby state on the conveyance path to the SD-
509 by the switchback roller.
• The second sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack is then conveyed and fed into
the bypass route.
• At the same time that the first copy set/stack is fed out, the first and second sheets of the
second copy set/stack are conveyed onto the alignment section.
A0HRT2C009DB
SD-509
Switchback roller
Tray2
Conveyance path to the SD-509
Bypass route
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 490/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. CONVEYANCE SECTION
17
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
D. Conveyance to SD-509• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is further conveyed onto the
path toward tray2 and, when the trailing edge of the paper moves past the lower path
sensor, the switchback roller is brought to a temporary stop.
• The switchback roller is thereafter turned backward, so that the paper is conveyed into
the SD-509.
A0HRT2C010DB
Switchback roller
Lower path sensor (PS9)
SD-509
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 491/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
18
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
6.1 Drive
A0HRT2C011DB
Lift belt
Tray2
Elevate motor (M15)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 492/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
19
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Tray lift
A. Tray lift operation• The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the elevate motor drives the
lift belt.
• The tray2 moves up or down depending on the direction in which the lift belt is driven.
B. Paper detection• The tray2 upper position sensor keeps the specified distance between the upper surface
of the paper exited to the tray2 and the paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment
of the exited paper.
• The tray2 upper position sensor and tray2 lower position sensor detect a full-of-paper
condition of the tray2.
• When both of these sensors are activated, a corresponding message appears on the
control panel.
• The tray2 lower position switch detects the lower limit of the tray.
A0HRT2C012DB
Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)
Tray2 upper positionswitch (SW2)
Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)
Tray2
Elevate motor (M15)
Lift belt
Tray2 lower positionswitch (SW3)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 493/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
20
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
6.2.2 Exit to tray1
• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is fed out into the tray1 by
the tray1 exit roller by way of the registration roller and paper passage roller.
• The upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate are also operated to
convey the paper into the tray1.
• The paper passage motor/2 provides drive for the tray1 exit roller.
A0HRT2C015DB
Upper lower pathswitching gate
Paper passage motor/2 (M3)Tray1 pathswitching gate
Tray1 exit roller
Tray1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 494/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
21
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
6.2.3 Exit to tray2
• The exit motor is energized to convey paper onto tray2.
• To collect sheets of paper in the alignment section during stapling, the exit roll is tempo-
rarily retracted.
• When the stapling operation is completed, the exit roll is pressed, so that the paper is fed
out into tray2.
• The exit roller retraction motor provides drive for retraction of the exit roll.
A. Normal paper exit operation• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller, the exit motor is energized and the paper is conveyed onto tray2.
A0HRT2C013DB
Tray2 exit roller
Exit motor (M5)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 495/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
22
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
B. Paper exit operation during stapling• When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit sensor of the main body, the
exit roller retraction motor is energized to retract the exit roll.
• After the paper is processed, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to press the exit
roll and the paper is fed out by drive from the exit motor.
A0HRT2C014DB
Exit roll
Exit roller retraction motor (M9)
Exit motor (M5)
Tray2 exit roller
A0HRT2C026DA
Before pressure After pressure
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 496/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION
23
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
6.2.4 Tray2 shift control
• The tray2 is moved to the front or rear in order to offset one copy set/stack with respect to
another in the sort or group mode.
• The tray2 shift motor provides drive for the front-to-rear shift motion of the tray2.
A0HRT2C016DB
Tray2
Tray2 shift motor (M16)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 497/569
6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
24
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
A. Tray1 shift operation• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2
exit roller in the sort/group mode, the tray2 shift motor is energized to perform the shift
operation.
• When the tray2 shift motor is energized, the shift frame is moved to the right or left via a
gear train, which results in tray2 operatively connected to the shift frame being moved to
the right or left.
• If a command for the next paper is received, the tray2 shift motor is energized again toperform the shift operation.
• The shift position of the tray2 is controlled by the tray2 shift home sensor. The sensor is
activated when the tray2 is at its home position (ordinary position).
• The amount of shift operation of the tray2 is 30 mm.
A0HRT2C019DB
Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)
Tray2 shift motor (M16)
30 mm
Tray2
Shift frame
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 498/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
25
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7.1 Drive
A0HRT2C017DB
Alignment plate
Alignment plate motor (M13)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 499/569
7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
26
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Alignment plate
• The alignment plates align sheets of paper in the crosswise direction inside the finisher.
• The alignment plate motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to open/close the
alignment plates to perform the alignment of the paper.
• The alignment plate motor rotates to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment
plate belts.• The alignment plate home sensor detects the home position of the alignment plates.
A0HRT2C018DB
Alignment plate motor(M13)
Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)
Alignment plate
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 500/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION
27
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism
• The paper fed out from the main body goes in the alignment section by its own weight.
• The accommodation paddle motor operates the accommodation paddle and rewind pad-
dles to convey paper reliably onto the alignment section.
A0HRT2C020DB
Rewind paddle
Accommodation paddlemotor (M12)
Accommodationpaddle
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 501/569
8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
28
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
8. STAPLER
8.1 Drive
A0HRT2C021DB
Stapler movement motor (M11)
Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)
Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19)
Stapler unit
Belt
A0HRT2C027DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 502/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. STAPLER
29
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
F S - 5 2 7
8.2 Operation
8.2.1 Stapler movement
A. Stapler movement operation• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.
• Rotation of the stapler movement motor drives the belt through the pulley, which moves
the stapler mounted on the belt.
• The stapler stop position varies depending on the staple position and paper size.• In the two-point stapling mode, the stapler is stopped at a position a given distance rela-
tive to the stapler home sensor/2 to staple sheets.
• In the one-corner stapling mode using A4 or A3 paper, the stapler stops at the stapler
home sensor/1 to staple sheets. For any other paper size, the stapler stops a position a
predetermined distance away relative to the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets.
A0HRT2C028DA
Belt
Stapler home sensor/2 (PS19)
Stapler
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 503/569
8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
30
F S - 5 2 7
O P E R A T I O N
8.2.2 Stapler control
• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.
A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper.
Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.
B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the stapler motor per-
forms the stapling operation.
• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor in the stapler detects
the home position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection• The main body determines that staples have been jammed, if the stapler home sensor is
not activated within a predetermined period of time after it has been deactivated during a
stapling operation. The stapler motor is then rotated backward to bring the stapler back
to its home position.
(3) Staple detection and cartridge detection• When the staples run out, or if there is no cartridge loaded in position, the staple empty
switch turns ON and the main body displays a corresponding staple empty message on
the control panel.
A0HRT2C023DB
Paper
Stapler (clincher side)
Stapler (stapler side)Stapler motor (M18)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 504/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 505/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 506/569
P K - 5 1 7
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
PK-517
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2
3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................3
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 5
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Skew correction mechanism................................................................................. 5
5.2 Punch mechanism................................................................................................ 6
5.3 Punch status detection .........................................................................................7
5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism ........................................................... 8
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 507/569
P K - 5 1 7
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 508/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 7
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper type
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Punch kit
Type FS-integrated type punching operation device
Punching method Stops and punches every paper
No. of holes 2-3 holes / 4 holes / Sweden 4 holes
Hole diameter/pitch
2 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 108 mm pitch
4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch
Sweden 4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch
Supported mode Punch mode
Applicable post processingmode
Sort, group, staple
Size
2 hole punch setting:
11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11/8-1 / 2 x 11S
3 hole punch setting:
11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 11
4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5
Sweden 4 hole punch setting:
A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5
Supported paperPlain paper, bond paper, thick paper 1/1+/2/3
(Main unit specifications prioritized)
Weight60 to 256 g/m2
16 to 68 lb
Punch prohibited paper
Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,
and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit
or the punch blade
Dimensions58 mm (W) x 470 mm (D) x 135 mm (H)
2.28 inch (W) x 18.50 inch (D) x 5.31 inch (H)
Weight 1.8 kg (3.97 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 509/569
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 7
2. UNIT CONFIGURATION
A10ET1C001DB
Punch section
Punch scraps box section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 510/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. PAPER PATH
3
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 7
3. PAPER PATH
A10ET1C002DB
Punch scraps box
Punch kit
Paper path fromthe main body
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 511/569
3. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O U T L I N E
P K - 5 1 7
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 512/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONFIGURATION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 7
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
4. CONFIGURATION
5. OPERATION
5.1 Skew correction mechanism
• For punch operation, a loop is formed in the paper at the conveyance roller to correct
skew.
• The paper passage sensor/1 detects the leading edge of the paper and the conveyance
roller forms a loop in the paper.• The paper passage motor/1 is then energized after a given period of time after the paper
passage sensor/1 is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the convey-
ance roller to start turning.
A10ET2C001DA
4512T2C002DA
Conveyance roller
Paper passage sensor/1(PS1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 513/569
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
P K - 5 1 7
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Punch mechanism
• The paper passage sensor/1 will detect the trailing edge of the paper and stop feeding
the paper after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.
• The drive cam will be rotated by the punch motor/1(2) to move the slide cam back and
forth. The slide cam will move the puncher down to make the punch hole at the back
edge of the paper. (The punch hole will be made sheet by sheet.)
A10ET2C004DA
Puncher
A10ET2C002DA
Paper passagesensor/1 (PS1)
Puncher
Punch motor/1 (M100)Punch motor/2 (M101)
Slide cam
Paper feed direction
Slide cam
Punch motor/1 (M100)Punch motor/2 (M101)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 514/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OPERATION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
P K - 5 1 7
5.3 Punch status detection
• The punch status is detected by the punch cam position sensor, punch home sensor/1,
and the punch pulse sensor/1.
A10ET2C003DA
Punch cam position sensor (PS200)
Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)Punch pulse sensor/2 (PS301)
Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)
Punch home sensor/2 (PS101)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 515/569
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
P K - 5 1 7
O P E R A T I O N
5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism
• The punch trash box is provided with the punch hole full sensor. When a punch waste is
detected, the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel.
• The punch hole full sensor is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch
trash.
• Punch hole full sensor also detects whether or not the punch trash box is mounted.
“Punch dust full” message will be displayed on the control panel when the punch trashbox is not mounted.
A10ET2C005DA
Punch hole full sensor (PS30)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 516/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 517/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 518/569
S D - 5 0 9
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
SD-509
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 4
4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4
4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................5
4.2.1 Alignment ...................................................................................................... 5
4.2.2 Stopper ......................................................................................................... 7
5. STAPLER ................................................................................................................ 9
5.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 9
5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 10
5.2.1 Stapling ....................................................................................................... 10
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING .......................................................................... 11
6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 116.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 12
6.2.1 Folding plate................................................................................................ 12
6.2.2 Folding conveyance .................................................................................... 13
7. EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 15
7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15
7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 16
7.2.1 Exit .............................................................................................................. 16
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 519/569
S D - 5 0 9
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 520/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 9
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Paper(1) Saddle stitching
(2) Folding
C. Machine specifications
D. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
E. Consumables• Staples 5000 (SK-602: Staple kit)
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Saddle sticher
Type Built into the finisher
Installation Screwed to the finisher
Document alignment Center
Stapling function Center parallel two points
Type Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2
Size
A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide
Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch
Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
Max. saddle stitching capacity
15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
+ 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)
Type Plain paper
Size
A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide
Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inchMax: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch
Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)
Dimensions239 mm (W) x 579 mm (D) x 534 mm (H)
9.41 inch (W) x 22.80 inch (D) x 21.02 inch (H)
Weight 24 kg (52.91 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 521/569
2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
S D - 5 0 9
2. PAPER FEED PATH
A10DT1C001DB
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 522/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
A10DT2C001DA
Exit section
Alignment section
Stapler
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 523/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
4.1 Drive
A10DT2C002DB
Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M24)
Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M23)
Alignment plate/FAlignment plate/R
Leading edge stopperLeading edge stopper motor (M20) Leading edgestopper
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 524/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Alignment
• In the folding/saddle stitching mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R aligns
paper.
• The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the
alignment plates, thereby aligning paper in the main scanning direction.
• The leading edge stopper motor is rotated to raise the leading edge stopper up to a posi-tion of the paper to be stored, thereby aligning paper in the sub-scanning direction.
A. Alignment operation• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via
the alignment belts.• The center staple alignment home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the align-
ment plates.
• The leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper in the vertical
direction via the belt.
A10DT2C003DB
Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M24)
Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)
Alignment plate/F
Alignment plate/R
Leading edge stopper
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
Center staple alignmenthome sensor/F (PS42)
Center staple alignmenthome sensor/R (PS41)
Paddle
Upper paddle motor (M21)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 525/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
B. Alignment control• When the first sheet of paper undergoes a switchback operation, the center staple align-
ment motor/F and /R start rotating to bring the alignment plates closer to each other and
then bring them to a stop at the standby positions at which they are apart from each at a
distance slightly wider than the paper width.
• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating
in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a
specified period of time since the saddle path sensor detects the trailing edge of thepaper.
• The paper alignment operation in the main scanning direction is performed each time a
sheet of paper is fed in.
C. Paddle control• After the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the saddle path sensor has
detected the leading edge of the paper, the upper paddle motor is rotated to align the
paper in the sub-scanning direction.
• The paddles are rotated each time a sheet of paper is fed in.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 526/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. ALIGNMENT SECTION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
4.2.2 Stopper
• At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers
conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.
• The leading edge grip holds the paper when moving it to a specified position, or when
stapling or folding it.
A. Stopper operation• The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accor-
dance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home
position.
A10DT2C004DA
Leading edge stopper
Leading edge grip
Leading edge stopper motor (M20)
Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)
Leading edge grip
Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 527/569
4. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
B. Stopper control(1) Folding mode• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.
(2) Saddle stitching mode• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON
and the sheets of paper are held in place.
• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the
leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.
• After stapling operation was completed, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R
opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move
the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper to the folding position.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 528/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. STAPLER
9
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
5. STAPLER
5.1 Drive
A10DT2C005DA
Staple motor
Drive gear
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 529/569
5. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
10
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Stapling
• The stapling operation is performed by the staple motor.
A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the staple motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press sec-
tion to the clincher by the drive gear to hold the paper and punch out the staple. Then,the staple is bent in the clincher.
B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor per-
forms the stapling operation.
• The stapling operation is completed when the sensor in the stapler detects the home
position and turn ON.
(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the
staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home position if
the sensor in the stapler does not turn ON after a specified period of time since it turn
OFF.
A10DT2C006DA
Stapler
Clincher Drive gear
Staple
Staple motor
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 530/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
11
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
6.1 Drive
A10DT2C007DB
Folding rollerFolding plate
Center fold platemotor (M26)
Center fold rollermotor (M25)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 531/569
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
12
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Folding plate
• The center fold plate motor drives the folding plate.
A. Folding plate operation• The center fold plate motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the
paper to the nip section with the folding plate.• The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.
• The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.
B. Folding plate control
• The center fold plate motor turns ON and sticks out the folding plate to the paper after aspecified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.
• The center fold plate motor stops when the folding plate reciprocates and the center fold
plate home sensor turns ON.
A11RT2C014DA
Fold plate
Paper
Folding roller
Leading edge stopper
Center fold platehome sensor (PS47)
Crank shaft
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 532/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING
13
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
6.2.2 Folding conveyance
• The center fold roller motor drives the folding roller.
A10DT2C009DA
Folding roller
Center fold rollermotor (M25)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 533/569
6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
14
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
A. Folding conveyance control• The center fold plate motor turns ON after the leading edge stopper stops at the folding
position.
• When the center fold plate motor turns ON the center fold plate home sensor, the center
fold roller motor turns ON and folds the paper.
• The center fold roller motor stops after a specified period of time since the paper sensor/
2 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.
B. Folding roller control• Different folding roller controls are performed depending on the number of sheets of
paper and the size of the paper.
(1) The paper width is 215.9 mm or more and the number of sheets of paper is lessthan six
• When the center fold plate home sensor is deactivated after the center fold plate motor
has been energized, the center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low
speed.
• The folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed after the lapse of a predeter-
mined period of time after it has started rotating.
• When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge
stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position
defined according to the paper size.
(2) Other than above• The center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low speed a predetermined
period of time before the paper stack reaches the center fold position.
• The center fold plate motor is energized and, after the lapse of a predetermined period of
time after the center fold plate home sensor has been deactivated, the folding roller is
made to start rotating at high speed.
• When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge
stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position
defined according to the paper size.
A10DT2C010DA
Paper sensor/2 (PS44)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 534/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. EXIT SECTION
15
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S D - 5 0 9
7. EXIT SECTION
7.1 Configuration
A10DT2C008DA
Booklet tray near fullsensor (PS48)
Booklet tray fullsensor (PS50)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 535/569
7. EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
16
S D - 5 0 9
O P E R A T I O N
7.2 Operation
7.2.1 Exit
• The paper fed out by the center fold roller motor is stacked in the tray by its own weight.
A. Full-of-paper detection• The capacity of the tray varies depending on the number of sheets of paper in the paper
sets/stacks fed into the tray and detection of a full-of-paper condition cannot be madebased on the number of sheets of paper stacked in the tray.
The main body therefore counts the number of sheets of paper stacked and detects a
full-of-paper condition when a predetermined number of sheets of paper is reached.
If the booklet tray full sensor remains activated for a predetermined period of time, the
main body determines that paper can no longer be fed into the tray and that there is a
full-of-paper condition in the tray.
B. Full-of-paper detection conditions• The booklet tray full sensor is activated.
• The booklet tray near full sensor is activated when the power switch is turned ON.• The number of sets/stacks stacked in the tray reaches a predetermined value during
copying.
• A set/stack having a paper length different from that fed out earlier is fed out.
The main body does not determine that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray under
any condition other than above.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 536/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 537/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 538/569
J S -
6 0 3
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
JS-603
OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1
2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION3. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4
5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5
5.1 Conveyance/exit section ....................................................................................... 5
5.1.1 Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 5
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching........................................................................... 5
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism...............................................................6
5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction ........................................................................ 7
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 539/569
J S - 6 0 3
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 540/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1
O U T L I N E
J S - 6 0 3
OUTLINE
1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
A. Type
B. Functions
C. Paper
D. Machine specifications
E. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.
NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
Name Job separator
Type Fixed to the finisher
Document align-
mentCenter
Modes Sort, group
Size Type Capacity
A5S, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide
5-1 / 2 X 8-1 / 2S, 8-1 / 2 X 11S/8-1 / 2 X 11, 8-1 / 2 X
14, 11 X 17, 12-1 / 4 X 18
Max.: 311.15 mm X 457.2 mm
12.25 inch X 18 inch
Min.: 139.7 mm X 182 mm5.5 inch X 7.17 inch
Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)
(16 to 24 lb)100 sheets
Special
paper
Thick paper 1 (91 to 120 g/m2)
(24.25 to 32 lb)
10 sheets
Thick paper 1+ (121 to 157 g/m2)
(32.25 to 41.75 lb)
Thick paper 2 (158 to 209 g/m2)
(42 to 55.5 lb)
Thick paper 3 (210 to 256 g/m2)
(55.75 to 68 lb)Thick paper 4 (257 to 300 g/m2)
(68.25 to 80 lb)
OHP film
Label
Envelope
Power require-
ments
DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)
DC5 V ± 5 %
Dimensions165 mm (W) X 389 mm (D) X 63 mm (H)
6.5 inch (W) X 15.31 inch (D) X 2.48 inch (H)
Weight 1.0 kg (2.2 lb)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 541/569
2. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O U T L I N E
J S - 6 0 3
2. PAPER PATH
A10FT1C001DA
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 542/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 3. CONFIGURATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
J S -
6 0 3
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
3. CONFIGURATION
A10FT2C002DB
Conveyance/exit section
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 543/569
4. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
J S - 6 0 3
O P E R A T I O N
4. DRIVE
A10FT2C003DA
Tray3 exit roller retractionmotor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 544/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OPERATION
5
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
J S -
6 0 3
5. OPERATION
5.1 Conveyance/exit section
5.1.1 Paper conveyance
• The paper passage motor/1 is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper
has activated the paper passage sensor/1.
• Drive of the paper passage motor/1 rotates the exit roller, so that paper is conveyed intothe tray.
5.1.2 Conveyance path switching• The horizontal conveyance section of FS-527 is provided with a conveyance path switch-
ing mechanism for conveying paper onto JS-603. For details of the mechanism, see the
horizontal conveyance section of FS-527.
A10FT2C004DB
Exit roller
Paper passage motor/1 (M1)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 545/569
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
6
J S - 6 0 3
O P E R A T I O N
5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism
• The tray3 full sensor is located at the exit of the tray, detecting a full-of-paper condition of
the tray.
• The actuator is operated each time paper is fed into the tray. When the level of paper fed
into the tray reaches a predetermined value (capacity), the sensor is blocked and the
main body determines that the tray is full of paper.
• The number of sheets of paper that is detected as a full-of-paper condition is 100 sheets
in terms of plain paper.
• The number of sheets of paper detected as a full-of-paper condition, however, varies
depending on the environmental conditions and the amount of curl in paper.
A10FT2C005DA
Actuator
Tray3 full sensor (PS36)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 546/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OPERATION
7
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
J S -
6 0 3
5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction
• The tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper
to be temporarily fed into the tray when a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.
• When a pressure/retraction command is received, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is
energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn, which causes the lifting lever to
swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and retracted.
A10FT2C006DA
Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)
Lifting cam
Tray3 exit roller retractionsensor (PS35)
Lifting lever
Exit roller
A10FT2C007DB
RetractionPressure
Exit roller
Lifting cam
Lifting lever
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 547/569
5. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
8
J S - 6 0 3
O P E R A T I O N
A. Exit roller pressure/retraction overview• The exit roller is in its retracted condition during a normal print cycle. It is pressed when
paper exit into tray3 during a 2-sided print cycle.
• When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or the front door open/
close, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized to bring the exit roller into its
retracted condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.
B. Exit roller pressure/retraction operation• When the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half
turn. The lifting lever is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction opera-
tion.
• Whether the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked or unblocked determines thecondition of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.
• When the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked and unblocked, the tray3 exit roller
retraction motor is deenergized to stop the operation.
Roller pressure/retraction conditionNormal printing Retracted
2-sided printing (except for small size paper)
Retracted → pressed → retractedThe main body is turned ON or retracted from the sleep mode,
or the front door is opened/closed
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor
Pressed Blocked
Retracted Unblocked
A10FT2C008DA
Lifting lever
Lifting camExit roller Tray3 exit roller retractionmotor (M17)
Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 548/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 549/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 550/569
A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1
O T - 5 0 3
O U T L I N E
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503
AU-101/AU-1021. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
AU-2011. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2
OT-5031. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 551/569
O T - 5 0 3
O U T L I N E
O P E R A T I O N
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 552/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. CONFIGURATION
1
A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1
O T - 5 0 3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
AU-101/AU-102
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.
• Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein
patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein pattern authentication system canprovide high security.
• With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is
created. The vein pattern image is registered and a person can be identified if the per-
son’s vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.
A00JT2C256AA
Ultra-red LED
Vein image
Camera
Finger
VeinAuthentication unit (AU-101)
A0P0T2C581AA
Finger
Authentication unit (AU-102)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 553/569
1. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
O T - 5 0 3
O P E R A T I O N
AU-201
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.
• The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B,
and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
• It can be used that the card corresponded to Felica, TypeA, SSFC (Shared Security For-
mats Cooperation), FCF (Felica common-use format), or FCF campus.
• Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from
the card.
ABCDE_Co.
Abcde Fgdhi
A00HT2C302AA
Non-contact IC card
Authentication unit (AU-201)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 554/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. CONFIGURATION
3
A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1
O T - 5 0 3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
OT-503
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• Output Tray OT-503 is comprised a fan unit and a paper exit tray.
• In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, three tucking fan motors installed in the
fan unit send outside air to an ejected paper for cool it down.
A092T2C501AA
Fan unit
Paper exit tray
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 555/569
2. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
O T - 5 0 3
O P E R A T I O N
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 556/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 557/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 558/569
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
EK-604/605/SC-507
EK-6041. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
EK-6051. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3
SC-5071. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 4
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 4
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 559/569
O P E R A T I O N
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 560/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. CONFIGURATION
1
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7EK-604
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
A0YCT2C502AA
Local Interface Kit EK-604
USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 561/569
1. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
2
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7
O P E R A T I O N
EK-605
1. CONFIGURATION
A0YCT2C504AA
Local Interface Kit EK-605
USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 562/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. OPERATION
3
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 72. OPERATION
• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.
• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard
input.
• The local interface kit is mounted when the voice guidance function and functions inter-
acting with the portable phone or PDA (portable data terminal) compatible with Bluetooth
are to be used. It has a built-in speaker and Bluetooth communication receiver.• Using Bluetooth, the user can print files directly from the portable phone, download and
print PDF or other files from the portable phone, or save them in a box.
• If an XHTML file is downloaded from the portable phone, an image file can be down-
loaded from the URL described in XHTML and printed as an image onto a location spec-
ified in the XHTML document.
A0YCT2C503AAPortable phone, PDA
Local Interface Kit EK-605
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 563/569
1. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
4
E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7
O P E R A T I O N
SC-507
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• The security kit offers the copy guard (copy prohibited) and password copy functions in
addition to the conventional copy protect function. The copy guard security pattern or
password copy security pattern printed on the original is detected to thereby prevent
unauthorized copies from being produced.
* The copy guard security pattern and password copy security pattern can be detected
only by the Konica Minolta machine mounted with the copy guard and password copy
functions.
A0Y9T2C501AA
Security Kit SC-507
A0Y9T2C504AA
Making a copy from anoutput produced by add-ing the copy guard secu-rity pattern or passwordcopy security pattern.
Detecting the copyguard security pat-tern to discard the
job.
CopyPrint
Copying enabled throughpassword input.
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 564/569
SERVICE MANUAL
2010.12
Ver. 1.0
THEORY OF OPERATION
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 565/569
Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
1
1
1
1
2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition
Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 566/569
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S A - 5 0 2
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
i
CONTENTS
SA-502
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION1. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1
2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 567/569
O P E R A T I O N
S A - 5 0 2
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
ii
Blank Page
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 568/569
Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. CONFIGURATION
1
C O N F I G U R A T I O N /
O P E R A T I O N
S A - 5 0 2
CONFIGURATION/OPERATION
1. CONFIGURATION
2. OPERATION
• By mounting the scan accelerator kit, the image can be processed at high speed during
scan transmission, thus improving performance in scan functions.
• The scan accelerator kit is mounted at the FAX line 2, which disables addition of the FAX
line 2.
A0P0T2C622AAScan accelerator kit SA-502
8/21/2019 652 Service
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 569/569
2. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010
S A - 5 0 2
N